@BOOK{maps1, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-20}}, title = {{MAPS 88.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS}}, year = {{1988}}, volume = {{1}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{199}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{1-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-10}}, title = {{Verslag {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1988}}, volume = {{1}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{126}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{Opening en Mededelingen; Introductie deelnemers; Brainstorming {\TeX} aandachtsgebieden; Instellen werkgroepen voor de aandachtsgebieden; Formele zaken; Rondvraag; Sluiting.}}} @ARTICLE{1-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-14}}, title = {{Listserver}}, keywords = {{listserver,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1988}}, volume = {{1}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{55}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{1-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{15-16}}, title = {{{\TeX}HaX}}, keywords = {{{\TeX}HaX,mailing list,listserver}}, year = {{1988}}, volume = {{1}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{41}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Information on subscribing to {\TeX}HaX.}}} @ARTICLE{1-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{17-20}}, title = {{{\TeX} publications information}}, keywords = {{publications,mailing list,listserver}}, year = {{1988}}, volume = {{1}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{49}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Information on {\TeX} mailing lists.}}} @BOOK{maps2, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-52}}, title = {{MAPS 89.1}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{2}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{317}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{2-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{2-12}}, title = {{Verslag (1989/1)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{2}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{145}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{Opening; Agenda bijeenkomst 23 juni 1988; Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen; Ledenbestand status en contributie; Vragen gebruikers; Verslag/discussie werkgroepen; Rondvraag; Presentaties; Sluiting.}}} @ARTICLE{2-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-14}}, title = {{Werkgroepen Nederlandse {\TeX} gebruikersgroep}}, keywords = {{working group}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{2}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{68}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}} @ARTICLE{2-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{15}}, title = {{Besluitenlijst}}, keywords = {{NTG decisions}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{2}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{52}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{2-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{15}}, title = {{Lijst actiepunten}}, keywords = {{actions}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{2}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{52}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{2-5, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{17}}, title = {{VAX DOCUMENT}}, keywords = {{VAX DOCUMENT}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{2}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{62}}, author = {{Theo de Klerk}}, names = {{Theo de Klerk}}, abstract = {{VAX DOCUMENT is een commerci\"ele toepassing die op {\TeX} gebaseerd is. Aanvankelijk binnen Digital Equipment Co. ontwikkeld voor intern gebruik voor productie van alle VAX/VMS documentatie en s/w produkten, maar nu ook in gebruikerslicensie voor VAX/VMS gebruikers verkrijgbaar. Vanaf VMS V4 is het resultaat hiervan te zien.}}} @ARTICLE{2-6, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{19-20}}, title = {{Boeken over {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{book review}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{2}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{71}}, author = {{Theo de Klerk}}, names = {{Theo de Klerk}}, abstract = {{Bespreking `Einf\"uhrung in {\TeX}' (Norbert Schwartz); `{\TeX} f\"ur Fortgeschrittene' (Wolfgang Appelt); `{\LaTeX} eine Einf\"uhrung' (Helmut Kopka); `Kompaktf\"uhrer {\LaTeX}' (Reinhard Wonneberger)}}} @ARTICLE{2-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{21-22}}, title = {{{\TeX}-NL ledenlijst}}, keywords = {{listserver,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{2}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{52}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @BOOK{maps3, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-68}}, title = {{MAPS 89.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{943}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{3-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{2-8}}, title = {{Verslag (1989/2)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{125}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{Opening; Verslag bijeenkomst 24 november 1988; Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen; Verenigingszaken; Verslag/discussie werkgroepen; Vragen gebruikers; Rondvraag; Presentatie Oc\'e 6750 ({\TeX})-laserprinter; Sluiting.}}} @ARTICLE{3-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{9-10}}, title = {{Werkgroepen Nederlandstalige {\TeX} gebruikersgroep}}, keywords = {{working group}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{62}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}} @ARTICLE{3-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{11}}, title = {{Besluitenlijst}}, keywords = {{NTG decisions}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{39}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{3-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{11}}, title = {{Lijst actiepunten}}, keywords = {{actions}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{39}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{3-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{12}}, title = {{Ontvangen local guides en andere {\TeX} documenten}}, keywords = {{local guide}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{69}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht ontvangen local guides.}}} @ARTICLE{3-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-14}}, title = {{{\TeX}-NL subscription}}, keywords = {{listserver,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{68}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{3-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{15-18}}, title = {{NTG fileserver faciliteiten}}, keywords = {{fileserver}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{74}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}} @ARTICLE{3-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{19-24}}, title = {{Vragen van gebruikers}}, keywords = {{user questions}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{64}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Deze bijlage bevat de `vragen van de gebruikers' die gesteld zijn ten tijde van de NTG vergadering van mei 1989.}}} @ARTICLE{3-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{25-28}}, title = {{High Quality Printing of {\TeX}-DVI}}, keywords = {{high quality printing,Oc\'e,laser printers,Digital Equipment}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{115}}, author = {{Marius Broeren, Jan van Knippenberg}}, names = {{Marius Broeren, Jan van Knippenberg}}, abstract = {{Deze bijlage bevat de presentatie van Oc\'e, gehouden op de NTG bijeenkomst van 11 mei 1989.}}} @ARTICLE{3-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{29-30}}, title = {{A dBase III+ programme to generate a journal}}, keywords = {{dBase}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{90}}, author = {{Piet Roes}}, names = {{Piet Roes}}, abstract = {{This is a note about the implementation of a combination of dBase III+ and {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{3-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{31-42}}, title = {{{\TeX} en SGML}}, keywords = {{math,SGML,tables}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{243}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The markup of document elements via SGML is demonstrated with a few examples.}}} @ARTICLE{3-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{43-44}}, title = {{Ervaringen met fotozetters}}, keywords = {{fotozetters,Linotronic,PostScript}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{78}}, author = {{Geerd Haayer}}, names = {{Geerd Haayer}}, abstract = {{Sinds enige tijd bestaat de mogelijkheid om bij A.J. Scholten -- Transcripta fotozetsel van {\TeX}/dvi-files te laten maken. Het grote voordeel van Transcripta is dat er uitsluitend met {\TeX} gewerkt wordt en derhalve zeer veel deskundigheid bij het bedrijf in huis is. Men beschikt over een Linotronic 100, die een resolutie levert van 1270 dpi.}}} @ARTICLE{3-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{45-48}}, title = {{Verslag GUTenberg (16/17 mei 1989)}}, keywords = {{GUTenberg,report}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{140}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Thema: Grafische zaken en (La){\TeX}, met name picture omgeving en PostScript.}}} @ARTICLE{3-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{49-56}}, title = {{One year NTG; presentatie NTG in Utrecht en Karlsruhe}}, keywords = {{activities,NTG,Euro{\TeX}}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{201}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A history of the start of the NTG is given along with a survey of this first years' activities. The relation of NTG to other TUGs is also dealt with.}}} @ARTICLE{3-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{57-60}}, title = {{Verslag Nederlandse {\TeX} dagen (29/30 juni 1989)}}, keywords = {{NTG,meeting}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{145}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout, Nico Poppelier}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout, Nico Poppelier}}, abstract = {{The Dutch {\TeX} Users Group, in Dutch `Nederlandse {\TeX} Gebruikersgroep' or NTG, was started about one year ago in Groningen. At the meeting in the autumn of 1988 it was decided to have a first presentation to `the outside world' in the summer of 1989.}}} @ARTICLE{3-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{61-68}}, title = {{Verslag Stanford conferentie (20/23 aug 1989)}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,WEB,literate programming,math reviews,status {\TeX},{\TeX}3,{\LaTeX},PostScript}}, year = {{1989}}, volume = {{3}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{191}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Inhoudelijk: \begin{itemize} \item {\TeX} wordt aangepast o.a. ligaturen en \texttt{\language};\item \item {\LaTeX} aanpassing wordt niet door Leslie Lamport opgepakt, Frank M?\item \end{itemize} Organisatorisch: \begin{itemize} \item Lokale voorzitters vice presidents van BoD van TUG;\item \item TUGboat artikelen nu ook met Duitse samenvatting;\item \item Michael F coordinator multilingual aspecten;\item \item {\TeX}HaX distributie onder auspici\"en van TUG.\item \end{itemize} Producten: \begin{itemize} \item {\TeX} templates bij Hope Hamilton;\item \item Wordperfect-{\LaTeX} macro's bij Anita Hoover (of mij);\item \item Michael D's Gentle {\TeX} beschikbaar (of mij);\item \item KWIC van {\LaTeX} en {\TeX} opdrachten beschikbaar als Bell rapport;\item \item Arbor{\TeX}t's The Publisher volwassen.\item \end{itemize}}}} @BOOK{maps4, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-88}}, title = {{MAPS 90.1}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{546}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{4-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{3-9}}, title = {{Verslag (1990)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{60}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{Opening; Verslag bijeenkomst 11 mei 1989; Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen; Verslag/discussie werkgroepen; Verenigingszaken; Rondvraag; Sluiting.}}} @ARTICLE{4-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{10}}, title = {{Besluitenlijst}}, keywords = {{NTG decisions}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{8}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{4-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{10}}, title = {{{\TeX} kalender}}, keywords = {{calendar}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{8}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{4-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{11-12}}, title = {{Werkgroepen Nederlandstalige {\TeX} Gebruikersgroep}}, keywords = {{working group}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{15}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}} @ARTICLE{4-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-14}}, title = {{Begroting NTG 1990}}, keywords = {{budget}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{15}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{4-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{15}}, title = {{Ontvangen local guides en andere {\TeX} documenten}}, keywords = {{local guide}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{17}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht ontvangen local guides.}}} @ARTICLE{4-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{16-18}}, title = {{{\TeX}-NL subscription}}, keywords = {{listserver,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{16}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{4-8, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{19-22}}, title = {{NTG fileserver faciliteiten}}, keywords = {{fileserver}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{20}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}} @ARTICLE{4-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{23-26}}, title = {{Vragen van gebruikers}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{14}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{4-10, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{27-28}}, title = {{NTG Software Distributie Service}}, keywords = {{software distributie}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{17}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{4-11, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{29-30}}, title = {{NTG DOS-diskette Distributie Service}}, keywords = {{DOS,disks,distribution}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{17}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{4-12, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{31-32}}, title = {{Announcement {\TeX}90 Conference}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,Cork}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{19}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{The 1990 {\TeX} meeting in Europe is the fifth such conference organised since 1985. It also breaks new ground as the first to be a {\TeX} Users Group (TUG) meeting outside North America. The {\TeX} computer typesetting program is now widely established as the de facto standard in scientific, educational and commercial use for the setting of documents requiring very high standards of typographic control, particularly technical documents, and for applications where high quality, portability and device-independence are of importance.}}} @ARTICLE{4-13, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{33-34}}, title = {{Announcement SGML \& {\TeX} Conference}}, keywords = {{SGML,TUG conference,courses}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{18}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan, Theo Jurriens, Jan Maasdam, J. Bleeker}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan, Theo Jurriens, Jan Maasdam, J. Bleeker}}, abstract = {{Announcement of joint SGML User Group Holland and NTG meeting. Several courses are offered. Two parallel streams of lectures, one mainly devoted to SGML and the other to {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{4-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{35-42}}, title = {{Courses SGML \& {\TeX} Conference}}, keywords = {{courses,SGML,conference}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{59}}, author = {{diverse auteurs}}, names = {{diverse auteurs}}, } @ARTICLE{4-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{43-46}}, title = {{{\TeX}-NL discussies}}, keywords = {{listserver,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{20}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{4-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{47-51}}, title = {{Working group 1: Education; State of affairs}}, keywords = {{working group,education}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{39}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{An impression of what has been done by members of the WG, and others, is given. Members: C.G. van der Laan (coord.), T. Biegstraaten, G. Haayer, J.R. Luyten, P. Tutelaers. Known -- through december 1989 -- courseware and {\TeX}-related (Dutch) courses are mentioned in appendices.}}} @ARTICLE{4-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{52}}, title = {{Werkgroep 7: PC-zaken}}, keywords = {{working group,PC,MS-DOS}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{7}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroep 7: PC-zaken.}}} @ARTICLE{4-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{53-54}}, title = {{Werkgroep 10: SGML-{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{working group,SGML}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{11}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{An impression of what has been done by members of the WG is given. Members: C.G. van der Laan (coord.), T. Biegstraaten, J. Bleeker, D.C. Coleman, J. Grootenhuis. Prospects: Publishing houses strongly believe in the `marriage' of SGML and {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{4-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{55-56}}, title = {{Werkgroep 13: `Neerlandica'}}, keywords = {{working group,dutch}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{17}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroep 13: `Neerlandica'.}}} @ARTICLE{4-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{57-60}}, title = {{Werkgroep 14: Communicatie}}, keywords = {{working group,communication}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{28}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroep 14: Communicatie.}}} @ARTICLE{4-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{61-66}}, title = {{The Development of National {\LaTeX} styles}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},national styles}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{48}}, author = {{Johannes Braams, Victor Eijkhout, Nico Poppelier}}, names = {{Johannes Braams, Victor Eijkhout, Nico Poppelier}}, abstract = {{In its autumn 1988 meeting, the Dutch {\TeX} users group (NTG) established a working group (number 13) that was to concentrate on the problems involved in the use of {\TeX} for Dutch texts. Since then the working group, which includes the authors, has created a number of style options for {\LaTeX} that remedy some common problems with the non-English use of {\LaTeX}, and is on its way developing document styles that are compatible with the standard styles, but have a layout that is more palatable for Dutch users. In this article we treat implementation aspects of the styles and style options, and we discuss some matters of layout.}}} @ARTICLE{4-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{67-70}}, title = {{Unusual paragraph shapes}}, keywords = {{paragraph shapes}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{28}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, abstract = {{Although the {\TeX}book states that {\TeX}'s paragraph mechanism `can be harnessed to a surprising variety of tasks', the strangest paragraph shapes that I have implement use no feature of the line-breaking algorithm. Instead, I have found that the control sequences \texttt{\everypar} and \texttt{\lastbox} are extremely powerful tools. I give three examples of this.}}} @ARTICLE{4-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{71-72}}, title = {{Ingekomen brief}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX} cursussen}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{9}}, author = {{Nico Poppelier}}, names = {{Nico Poppelier}}, } @ARTICLE{4-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{73-76}}, title = {{Euro{\TeX} 89}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},conference}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{23}}, author = {{Johannes Braams, Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Johannes Braams, Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Algemeen: \begin{itemize} \item Polen stal de harten;\item \end{itemize} Organisatorisch: \begin{itemize} \item Veranderingen {\LaTeX}, gecoordineerd door Frank M. en Jan R.;\item \item Teaching {\TeX} in discussie;\item \item Cork bijeenkomst voorbereid;\item \item Zowel PD als commerci\"ele {\TeX} aktiviteiten nodig;\item \item Een Nederlandse vertaling van Schwarz's Einf\"uhrung in {\TeX} is op komst;\item \item Leerzaam handout voor potenti\"ele DANTE leden, inclusief questionnaire;\item \item Quixote Oriental Fonts project (Hosek);\item \end{itemize} Producten: \begin{itemize} \item Schroder's changebars macro;\item \item Thull's MS-DOS PD {\TeX};\item \item {\TeX}-omgevingen: PC{\TeX}E (MS-DOS), {\TeX}E (AOS/VS), CEO-{\TeX}E (Data General).\item \end{itemize}}}} @ARTICLE{4-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{77-82}}, title = {{Teaching {\TeX}: Critics \& {\LaTeX} proposal}}, keywords = {{education,courseware,modules}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{56}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Some critics -- mainly {\LaTeX} based -- on the approach are given: {\TeX}nically driven instead of result driven. Also is notified the omission of a general pedagogical method to be used. Furthermore, it is urged to have unified courseware. A set of {\LaTeX} courses is proposed. No test set is included. The underlying idea of having TUG certified courses world-wide is strongly endorsed.}}} @ARTICLE{4-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{83-88}}, title = {{Wat is {\TeX}?}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{4}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{48}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout, Nico Poppelier}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout, Nico Poppelier}}, abstract = {{In de huidige tijd van WYSIWYG `desktop publishing' systemen lijkt het vreemd een systeem te propageren met honderden, vaak ingewikkelde, instructies. Wat het tekstopmaaksysteem {\TeX} desondanks aantrekkelijk maakt, is het feit dat het programmeerbaar is: de basisinstructies kunnen worden samengevoegd tot zeer gecompliceerde instructies die een eenmaal ontworpen opmaak geheel automatisch feilloos reproduceren. Hierdoor hoeft de gebruiker uitsluitend nog de structuur van het document aan te geven en niet de vormgeving, het uiterlijk, ervan. Met deze gedachte sluit {\TeX} nauw aan bij recente ontwikkelingen in de uitgeverswereld omtrent SGML.}}} @BOOK{maps5, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-146}}, title = {{MAPS 90.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{1481}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{5-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{9}}, title = {{Besluitenlijst}}, keywords = {{NTG decisions}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{8}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{5-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{9}}, title = {{{\TeX} kalender}}, keywords = {{calendar}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{8}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{5-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{10-11}}, title = {{Werkgroepen NTG}}, keywords = {{working group}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{15}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}} @ARTICLE{5-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{12}}, title = {{Ontvangen Local Guides en andere {\TeX} documenten}}, keywords = {{local guide}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{17}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht ontvangen local guides.}}} @ARTICLE{5-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-15}}, title = {{{\TeX}-NL subscription}}, keywords = {{listserver,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{16}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{5-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{16-20}}, title = {{NTG fileserver faciliteiten}}, keywords = {{fileserver}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{23}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}} @ARTICLE{5-8, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{21-26}}, title = {{{\TeX} stuff at cs.ruu.nl}}, keywords = {{FTP,archives,mailserver,software}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{52}}, author = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, names = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, abstract = {{Here is a brief description of our archive of {\TeX} stuff. The archive is available by FTP and by mail server. It contains various things, a.o. Atari ST software, GNU software, some Unix software and a lot of {\TeX} things. I will concentrate on the {\TeX} stuff in this message.}}} @ARTICLE{5-9, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{27-28}}, title = {{NTG Software Distributie Service}}, keywords = {{NTG,distribution,software}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Deze bijlage beschrijft een aantal distributie-services die door enkele NTG leden worden uitgevoerd.}}} @ARTICLE{5-10, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{29-30}}, title = {{NTG DOS-diskette Distributie Service}}, keywords = {{MS-DOS,disks,distribution}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{18}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{5-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{31-34}}, title = {{Werkgroep 7: PC-zaken; {\TeX} voor MS/PC-DOS PC's}}, keywords = {{working group,PC,MS-DOS,Atari}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{40}}, author = {{Jos Winnink}}, names = {{Jos Winnink}}, abstract = {{Activiteiten van werkgroep 7: PC-zaken.}}} @ARTICLE{5-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{35-36}}, title = {{Werkgroep 8: NTG gebruikersdag; SGML-{\TeX} Seminar}}, keywords = {{working group,SGML,seminar}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{23}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Terugblik op organisatie.}}} @ARTICLE{5-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{37-38}}, title = {{Working group 13: `Neerlandica'}}, keywords = {{Neerlandica}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{22}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroep 13: `Neerlandica'.}}} @ARTICLE{5-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{39-42}}, title = {{SGML-{\TeX} conference, Groningen}}, keywords = {{SGML,conference}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{48}}, author = {{David Osborne}}, names = {{David Osborne}}, abstract = {{For their second full-day international meeting, the Nederlandstalige {\TeX} Gebruikersgroep (NTG) organised, in conjunction with the Dutch SGML Users Group, a conference intended to focus interest on the use of {\TeX} and SGMLtogether. On August 31st, approximately 100 delegates from both `camps' attended the day's events in Groningen, with what seemed a good balance between SGML-ers and {\TeX}ies.}}} @ARTICLE{5-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{43-48}}, title = {{Two faces of {\TeX}t}}, keywords = {{databases,document retrieval,searching,logical structure}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{75}}, author = {{Joop van Gent}}, names = {{Joop van Gent}}, abstract = {{{\TeX} as a programming tool for advanced document retrieval systems.}}} @ARTICLE{5-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{49-54}}, title = {{Towards {\LaTeX} 3.0}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX}3}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{86}}, author = {{Frank Mittelbach, Rainer Sch\"opf}}, names = {{Frank Mittelbach, Rainer Sch\"opf}}, abstract = {{{\LaTeX} is a very valuable tool for document composition. As a {\TeX} macro package, it is unique in its concept of logical commands, at the same time retaining enough flexibility with visually oriented commands to allow the user a relatively easy correction of an automatically chosen layout. This fact makes it far superior to the plain and AMS-{\TeX} macro packages when it comes to professional applications. Therefore the {\LaTeX} re-implementation project is certainly one of the most important efforts to `expand {\TeX}'s horizon'. This is the place to link {\TeX} with the modern developments like SGML. This paper describes the current status of the re-implementation of {\LaTeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{5-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{55-66}}, title = {{Getting {\TeX}nical: Insight into {\TeX} Macro Writing Techniques}}, keywords = {{techniques}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{211}}, author = {{Amy Hendrickson}}, names = {{Amy Hendrickson}}, abstract = {{Most of us understand the basic form of {\TeX} macros but that understanding alone is often inadequate when we need to solve certain problems. We need additional insight to be able to develop methods of passing information, moving text with changed catcodes, preserving blank lines, and more. Writing a large macro package brings in a new set of issues: how toavoid bumping into implementation restrictions, e.g., constraints of hash size, string size, and others; how to make a pleasant user interface; how to make your code as concise as possible. Some of the techniques to be discussed here include making a macro with a variable number of arguments; changing catcodes in macros, defining a macro whose argument is intentionally never used; conserving hash size by using counters instead of newifs; csname techniques and non-outer dynamic allocation; and table making techniques. Finally, some suggestions are included on methods to use when developing new macros.}}} @ARTICLE{5-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{67-70}}, title = {{The Document Style Designer as a Separate Entity}}, keywords = {{style design}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{34}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout, Andries Lenstra}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout, Andries Lenstra}}, abstract = {{An argument for the need for a programmable meta format: a format that introduces a new syntactic level in {\TeX} for document style designers.}}} @ARTICLE{5-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{71-74}}, title = {{The Dutch national {\LaTeX} effort}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},dutch}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{46}}, author = {{Johannes Braams, Victor Eijkhout, Nico Poppelier}}, names = {{Johannes Braams, Victor Eijkhout, Nico Poppelier}}, abstract = {{In this article an overview is given of the activities of working group 13 (WG 13) of the `Nederlandstalige {\TeX} Gebruikersgroep' (Dutch {\TeX} Users Group). This working group is also called `Neerlandica', and is interested in anything that has something to do with using {\LaTeX} (and {\TeX}) in a non-American environment. The topics tackled so far range from the design of a page layout suitable for A4 paper by adapting the American layout of article.sty to Dutch typographical tastes, to the implementation of a new letter style called `brief'.}}} @ARTICLE{5-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{77-84}}, title = {{TUGboat production: {\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, and paste-up}}, keywords = {{TUGboat,production}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{83}}, author = {{Barbara Beeton}}, names = {{Barbara Beeton}}, abstract = {{TUGboat has now completed more than ten years of publication. Starting with {\TeX}78 and an electrostatic printer and progressing through increasingly versatile software and hardware, the authors have kept us challenged, both with the content that the reader sees and the little tricks that happen `under the covers'. This talk will be a survey of some of the milestones of TUGboat production, our editorial philosophy, what we've learned about what {\TeX} can and cannot do, and some advice to authors and production editors of other publications.}}} @ARTICLE{5-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{85-88}}, title = {{SGML and {\TeX} at Elsevier Science Publishers}}, keywords = {{SGML,Elsevier,publishers}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{46}}, author = {{Jeroen Soutberg}}, names = {{Jeroen Soutberg}}, abstract = {{Contents: \begin{itemize} \item Introduction;\item \item ESP;\item \item Manuscript routing;\item \item Role of SGML;\item \item Role of ...{\TeX};\item \item Projects.\item \end{itemize}}}} @ARTICLE{5-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{89-90}}, title = {{NTG's second year}}, keywords = {{activities,NTG,Euro{\TeX}}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{26}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A survey of NTG's activities in its second year is enumerated.}}} @ARTICLE{5-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{91-92}}, title = {{Development of DANTE e.V.}}, keywords = {{Dante}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{20}}, author = {{Joachim Lammarsch}}, names = {{Joachim Lammarsch}}, } @ARTICLE{5-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{93-98}}, title = {{Verslag GUTenberg '90}}, keywords = {{GUTenberg}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{71}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Waarnemingen/beslissingen: \begin{itemize} \item Zusterclubs zijn automatisch lid van elkaar;\item \item DANTE en GUTenberg 100% gegroeid;\item \item TUGlib wordt uitgebreid met {\TeX} bibliografie;\item \end{itemize} Producten/macros: \begin{itemize} \item Zetten commutator diagrammen via {\LaTeX};\item \item Ook muziek zetten nu via {\TeX};\item \item Zetten van (ADA, ...) programma's;\item \item Zetten van bridge literatuur;\item \item Voor multilingual {\TeX}3.0 is ML{\TeX} nog nodig;\item \item {\TeX} in kleur?\item \end{itemize}}}} @ARTICLE{5-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{99-102}}, title = {{Board-of-Directors and Euro-Summit at Cork90}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},board-of-directors,Cork}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{47}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{TUG organizational: \begin{itemize} \item TUG is really open now;\item \item Working Groups will be sent off with better task\item \end{itemize} descriptions and reporting time schedules; \begin{itemize} \item How to fulfil better membership needs is proposed;\item \item A scholarly TUGboat and a separate newsletter is proposed;\item \end{itemize} Topical TUGboat issues are under consideration; \begin{itemize} \item No increased membership/postage fees for those outside USA;\item \item The dangling reciprocal membership question is near to a pilot study;\item \item BoD can operate faster because of adoption of voting by e-mail;\item \item An extended membership directory is asked for;\item \item A resource directory is asked for;\item \item Maintenance/evolution of {\TeX} etc. software must be handled by TUG and LUGs; DEK and LL are out of it!\item \item More attention will be paid to PR activities: Welcome c.q. Information/Demo packets will be prepared;\item \end{itemize} Euro-Summit: \begin{itemize} \item Eastern and Western European countries will exchange information;\item \item A status report, Euro-Summit Cork90 (?), will appear with contact addresses and status reports.\item \end{itemize}}}} @ARTICLE{5-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{103-108}}, title = {{Report European {\TeX} conference Cork90}}, keywords = {{conference,Cork,Euro{\TeX}}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{69}}, author = {{Nico Poppelier, Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Nico Poppelier, Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The following was on at this joint TUG90 and Euro{\TeX}90 meeting at Cork. Hypertext and {\TeX}. Cork encoding scheme for 8 bit fonts. Halftone output from {\TeX}. Macro writing in {\TeX}, especially Getting {\TeX}nical. The Dutch {\TeX} efforts were reported. The issue of a {\TeX} archive was raised again. Text around figures in {\LaTeX}. Document design and style development. Proposals for {\LaTeX}3.0. SGML and {\TeX} for tables and Math. Graphics and {\TeX}, such as PiC{\TeX} use, tif format and pk files. Old german fonts. BiB{\TeX} requirements. Discussion of {\TeX} books. The question of {\TeX} at schools was raised.}}} @ARTICLE{5-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{109-112}}, title = {{{\TeX} structuurschema's}}, keywords = {{filetypes,coherence,structure}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{24}}, author = {{Huub Mulders}}, names = {{Huub Mulders}}, abstract = {{Overzicht van de structuur van {\TeX} en METAFONT en de bijbehorende bestandtypen.}}} @ARTICLE{5-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{113-114}}, title = {{The 1990 DECUS {\TeX} Collection}}, keywords = {{Decus}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{The DECUS Languages and Tools SIG Public Domain Working Group and the Electronic Publishing SIG {\TeX}/{\LaTeX}/WEB Working Group are proud to announce the 1990 DECUS {\TeX} Collection. This col-lection offers nearly everything a {\TeX} User would want on their system for {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{5-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{115-117}}, title = {{New books on {\TeX} (1)}}, keywords = {{book review}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{35}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, abstract = {{Review of `Introduction to {\TeX}' (Jost Krieger, Norbert Schwartz), `{\TeX} for the advanced' (Wolfgang Appelt), `{\TeX} for the impatient' (Paul Abrahams).}}} @ARTICLE{5-30, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{118-121}}, title = {{An indentation scheme}}, keywords = {{indentation,paragraph}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{36}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, abstract = {{Indentation is one of the simpler things in {\TeX}: if you leave one input line open you get a new paragraph, and it is indented unless you say \texttt{\noindent}. And if you get tired of writing \texttt{\noindent} all of the time, you declare \texttt{\parindent=0pt} at the start of your document. Easy. More sophisticated approaches to indentation are possible, however. In this article I will sketch a quite general approach that can easily be incorporated in existing macro packages. For a better appreciation of what goes on, I will start with a tutorial section on what happens when {\TeX} starts a paragraph.}}} @ARTICLE{5-31, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{122-124}}, title = {{A parskip scheme}}, keywords = {{\parskip,\everypar,paragraph,skips}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{35}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, abstract = {{In this article I will present an approach that unifies the paragraph skip and the white spaces surroundingvarious environments. Since the macros given below make use of the \texttt{\everypar} token list, this article may be seen as a sequel to an earlier paper on an indentation scheme, which is based on a similar principle. The \texttt{\everypar} parameter was explained there.}}} @ARTICLE{5-32, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{125-140}}, title = {{SGML (,{\TeX} and ...)}}, keywords = {{SGML}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{158}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{What SGML (and {\TeX}) is all about is given in a nutshell. Markup of example document elements, by SGML and {\LaTeX}, are provided. Coupling SGML to {\TeX} is considered by direct translation and by the intermediate procedural markup phase. Interfacing SGML to (La){\TeX} is also addressed. Some guidelines are provided in order to decide when SGML, or {\TeX} (alone, both, or neither) might be beneficial. It is a 3-in-1 paper: what is SGML and {\TeX} all about, examples of marked up copy in SGML and (La){\TeX} and the coupling issues, finished up with a literature compilation.}}} @ARTICLE{5-33, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{141-144}}, title = {{SGML en {\TeX} in scientific publishing}}, keywords = {{SGML,scientific publishing}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{54}}, author = {{Nico Poppelier}}, names = {{Nico Poppelier}}, abstract = {{Elsevier Science Publishershas for a few years investigated the possibility of accepting compuscripts, a manuscript in electronic form, created with {\TeX}, {\LaTeX} and a few other text processing systems, and converting these to SGMLform. This paper will discuss the current status of these activities, the reasons for converting compuscripts to SGMLform, and the various ways in which {\TeX} isused.}}} @ARTICLE{5-34, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{145-146}}, title = {{The future of {\TeX} and METAFONT}}, keywords = {{future}}, year = {{1990}}, volume = {{5}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{15}}, author = {{Donald Knuth}}, names = {{Donald Knuth}}, abstract = {{My work on developing {\TeX}, METAFONT, and Computer Modern has come to an end. I will make no further changes except to correct extremely serious bugs.}}} @BOOK{maps6, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-117}}, title = {{MAPS 91.1}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{1243}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{6-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{3-10}}, title = {{Verslag (1991/1)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{91}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{Opening; Verslag bijeenkomst 11 mei 1990; Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen; Stand van zaken Europese samenwerking/TUG international; Verslag/discussie werkgroepen; Verenigingszaken; Rondvraag; SGML ({\TeX} and ...); Sluiting.}}} @ARTICLE{6-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{10}}, title = {{{\TeX} kalender}}, keywords = {{calendar}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{8}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{6-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{11-12}}, title = {{Werkgroepen NTG}}, keywords = {{working group}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{14}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}} @ARTICLE{6-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-14}}, title = {{Jaarverslag NTG 1990}}, keywords = {{report NTG}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{23}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{6-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{15-16}}, title = {{Financieel verslag 1990}}, keywords = {{financial report}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, } @ARTICLE{6-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{17}}, title = {{Concept begroting 1991}}, keywords = {{budget}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{19}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, } @ARTICLE{6-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{18-20}}, title = {{{\TeX}-NL subscription}}, keywords = {{TEX-NL,mailing list}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{17}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{6-8, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{21-26}}, title = {{NTG fileserver faciliteiten}}, keywords = {{fileserver}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{27}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}} @ARTICLE{6-9, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{27-28}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1991/1)}}, keywords = {{chairman}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{26}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{{\TeX} Nationaal en Internationaal. Oftewel: wat gebeurt er allemaal?}}} @ARTICLE{6-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{29-32}}, title = {{WG 1: Education}}, keywords = {{working group,education}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{54}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroep 1: Educatie.}}} @ARTICLE{6-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{33-36}}, title = {{WG 4: Fonts}}, keywords = {{working group,fonts,METAFONT}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{47}}, author = {{Erik-Jan Vens, Jos Winnink}}, names = {{Erik-Jan Vens, Jos Winnink}}, abstract = {{Activiteiten van de werkgroep Fonts.}}} @ARTICLE{6-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{37}}, title = {{WG 6: Lijst en link met fotozetters}}, keywords = {{working group,photo typesetter,inventory}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{15}}, author = {{Theo Jurriens}}, names = {{Theo Jurriens}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroep 6.}}} @ARTICLE{6-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{38-40}}, title = {{WG 7: PC-zaken; {\TeX} voor MS/PC-DOS PC's; Verkrijgbaarheid van em{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{working group,PC,MS-DOS,Atari,em{\TeX}}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{41}}, author = {{Jos Winnink, Pieter Bison}}, names = {{Jos Winnink, Pieter Bison}}, abstract = {{Activiteiten van werkgroep 7: PC-zaken, in het byzonder de situatie met betrekking tot em{\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{6-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{41-42}}, title = {{Brief aan PC werkgroep: Enige suggesties voor WG-PC's}}, keywords = {{working group,PC,MS-DOS}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{27}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Voorgesteld wordt een praktisch set voor de PC's beschikbaar te stellen, en de educatie daar op af te stemmen.}}} @ARTICLE{6-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{43}}, title = {{WG 8: NTG conferentie}}, keywords = {{working group,conference}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{12}}, author = {{Joop van Gent}}, names = {{Joop van Gent}}, } @ARTICLE{6-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{44-46}}, title = {{WG 10: SGML-{\TeX}: Imposing structure upon {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{working group,SGML,structure}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{42}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Imposing structure upon {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{6-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{47}}, title = {{Gebruik van {\TeX} binnen het EGD}}, keywords = {{EGD,Quatro,conversion,tables}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{14}}, author = {{Henk Brouwer, J.A. Jager, P. Sader}}, names = {{Henk Brouwer, J.A. Jager, P. Sader}}, abstract = {{Conversie van tabellen binnen Quatro naar {\TeX}; het gebruik van macros binnen het EGD.}}} @ARTICLE{6-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{48-56}}, title = {{Gebruik van {\TeX} en {\LaTeX} op het CAWCS}}, keywords = {{CAWCS}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{164}}, author = {{Leo van Geest, Marion van Geest}}, names = {{Leo van Geest, Marion van Geest}}, abstract = {{Overzicht van het gebruik van {\TeX} op het CAWCS.}}} @ARTICLE{6-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{57-74}}, title = {{Math into BLUes}}, keywords = {{BLUe,math}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{268}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{{\TeX}ing mathscripts is not simply typing. Math has to be translated into {\TeX} commands. First the motivation for this work is given. Next traditional math page make-up is summarized along with the macroscopic math {\TeX} commands. After answering `Why {\TeX}ing mathscripts is difficult?' an anthology of {\TeX} falls and their antidotes is discussed. At the end suggestions are given in order to lessen the difficulties.}}} @ARTICLE{6-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{75-84}}, title = {{Babel, a multilingual style-option system for use with {\LaTeX}'s document styles}}, keywords = {{Babel,{\LaTeX},document styles,language,multilingual}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{85}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, abstract = {{The standard distribution of {\LaTeX} contains a number of document styles that are meant to be used, but also serve as examples for other users to create their own document styles. These styles have become very popular among {\LaTeX}. But it should be kept in mind that they were designed for American tastes and contain a number of hard-wired texts. This article describes a set of document-style options that can be used in combination with the standard styles, which makes the latter adaptable to other languages.}}} @ARTICLE{6-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{85-92}}, title = {{Frequently Asked Questions (I)}}, keywords = {{frequently asked questions,FAQ,comp.text.tex}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{89}}, author = {{Bobby Bodenheimer}}, names = {{Bobby Bodenheimer}}, abstract = {{This article contains answers to some frequently asked questions on comp.text.tex. Please don't ask these questions again, as they've been answered many times before.}}} @ARTICLE{6-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{93-98}}, title = {{Summary of METAFONT Fonts Available}}, keywords = {{METAFONT,fonts,availability}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{56}}, author = {{Liam Quin}}, names = {{Liam Quin}}, abstract = {{This report includes all known fonts available in METAFONT format, whether public domain or not. Archive sites for ftp are listed where known. There is also a BITNET archive at LISTSERV@UBVM.CC.BUFFALO.EDU.}}} @ARTICLE{6-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{99-106}}, title = {{Program text generation with {\TeX}/{\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{program text generation}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{82}}, author = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, names = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, abstract = {{Web; Cweb; Fweb; Spiderweb; Tgrind; C2{\LaTeX}; C++2{\LaTeX}; Cprog/Csty macros; Program environment; Scheme{\TeX}; Ada; Miscellaneous.}}} @ARTICLE{6-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{107-108}}, title = {{{\LaTeX} for engineers and scientists (book review)}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},engineers,scientists,book review}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{32}}, author = {{Nico Poppelier}}, names = {{Nico Poppelier}}, abstract = {{Review of `{\LaTeX} for engineers and scientists' by David J. Buerger.}}} @ARTICLE{6-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{109-112}}, title = {{The structure of the {\TeX} processor}}, keywords = {{{\TeX} processor,characters,tokens,lists,expansion}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{53}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, abstract = {{In this article I will describe the {\TeX} processor as a multi-layered engine that successively transforms characters into tokens, tokens into lists, and from these lists builds a typeset page.}}} @ARTICLE{6-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{113-117}}, title = {{Comments on the Future of {\TeX} and METAFONT}}, keywords = {{future,{\TeX},METAFONT}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{6}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{62}}, author = {{Nelson Beebe}}, names = {{Nelson Beebe}}, } @BOOK{maps7, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-135}}, title = {{MAPS 91.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{1714}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{7-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{3-9}}, title = {{Verslag (1991/2)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{85}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{Opening; Verslag bijeenkomst 20 november 1990; Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen; NTG jaarvergadering; Verslag/discussie werkgroepen; Rondvraag; NTG presentaties: `{\TeX} in de praktijk'; Sluiting.}}} @ARTICLE{7-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{9}}, title = {{{\TeX} kalender \& Glossary}}, keywords = {{calendar,glossary}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{7}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{7-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{10-11}}, title = {{Werkgroepen NTG}}, keywords = {{working group}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{11}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}} @ARTICLE{7-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{12-13}}, title = {{Begroting 1991 en 1992}}, keywords = {{budget}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{23}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, } @ARTICLE{7-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{14-16}}, title = {{{\TeX}-NL subscription}}, keywords = {{TEX-NL,mailing list}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{17}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{7-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{17-22}}, title = {{NTG fileserver faciliteiten}}, keywords = {{fileserver}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{28}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}} @ARTICLE{7-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{23}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1991/2)}}, keywords = {{chairman}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{22}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, } @ARTICLE{7-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{24-25}}, title = {{NTG's continuation: The Third Year}}, keywords = {{NTG,continuation}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{27}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{An NTG year of activity parallels the Dutch academic year: September to September. The membership increased by roughly 40% to circa 140 members of which 25 or so are institutional members. Due to the intermediate {\TeX} course some financial reserve has been built up. NTG's third year can be characterized by `continuation,' and the embarkation upon a multi-year project.}}} @ARTICLE{7-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{26-32}}, title = {{WG 1: Education; Contribution to TUG-LRP report}}, keywords = {{working group,education,TUG-LPR}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{84}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Worldwide {\TeX}/METAFONT education is proposed with compatible modules, such that a user can plan an education path. A pool of teachers is proposed. How to address the problem of qualified teachers is touched upon.}}} @ARTICLE{7-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{33-35}}, title = {{WG 1: Education; Review Michael Doob's A Gentle}}, keywords = {{book review,review}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{44}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Review of Michael Doob's `A Gentle Introduction to {\TeX}'.}}} @ARTICLE{7-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{36}}, title = {{WG 7: PC-zaken; {\TeX} voor MS/PC-DOS PC's en Atari's}}, keywords = {{working group,PC,MS-DOS,Atari}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Jos Winnink}}, names = {{Jos Winnink}}, abstract = {{Activiteiten van werkgroep 7: PC-zaken.}}} @ARTICLE{7-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{37-38}}, title = {{WG 13: `Neerlandica'; The Right of ij to be a Ligature}}, keywords = {{Neerlandica,ij-ligature}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{34}}, author = {{David van Leeuwen}}, names = {{David van Leeuwen}}, abstract = {{Discussion of the right of the Dutch `ij' to be a ligature.}}} @ARTICLE{7-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{39-40}}, title = {{Enige Suggesties aan de Redactie van de MAPS}}, keywords = {{MAPS}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{27}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{De functie van de MAPS wordt belicht en gerelateerd aan hoe dat te verwezenlijken. Punten aangestipt zijn: onjuiste afbrekingen, slecht-ogende automatische uitvullingen, en typos. Voorgestelde oplossing geen referee-mechanisme maar duidelijk aan de auteurs geven van wat van ze verwacht wordt plus overgaan op de nieuwere tools. Structureel is het te late verschijnen voorkomen vanwege het notulen-aspect: geen notulen geen vergadering.}}} @ARTICLE{7-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{41-46}}, title = {{A Font and a Style for Typesetting Chess using {\LaTeX} or {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{typesetting,chess,fonts}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{92}}, author = {{Piet Tutelaers}}, names = {{Piet Tutelaers}}, } @ARTICLE{7-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{47-50}}, title = {{Typesetting Bridge via {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{bridge,{\LaTeX}}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{35}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{{\LaTeX} macros and a bidding environment for typesetting bridge card distributions and bidding sequences are given. Examples borrowed from bridge literature are supplied.}}} @ARTICLE{7-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{51-62}}, title = {{Typesetting Bridge via {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{bridge,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{169}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Enhanced plain {\TeX} macros and a bidding environment for typesetting bridge card distributions and bidding sequences are given. As a follow-up of the {\LaTeX} macros given in [12]. Moreover, macros for annotated printing of the course of the play are provided. Examples of use are included.}}} @ARTICLE{7-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{63-68}}, title = {{Go diagrams with {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{go,diagrams}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{220}}, author = {{Hanna Ko{\l}odziejska}}, names = {{Hanna Ko{\l}odziejska}}, abstract = {{Encoureged by Zalman Rubinstein, who described his chess diagrams in TUGboat vol. 10 no. 2, I have prepared some special fonts and {\TeX} macros to be used in typesetting go diagrams.}}} @ARTICLE{7-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{69-70}}, title = {{Towers of Hanoi, revisited}}, keywords = {{tower of Hanoi}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{24}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Another version of {\TeX}ing of `The Towers of Hanoi' problem is provided, which does not assume Lisp knowledge, just plain {\TeX}. Also some variations of use are included, among others to remove the restriction on the disks: disk size can be supplied by more than one digit.}}} @ARTICLE{7-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{71-75}}, title = {{6th European {\TeX} Conference}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},conference,Paris}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{64}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{\begin{itemize} \item User groups:\\ CyrTUG is bound to become important. CSTUG prospers. HunTUG is modest. The Poles can't get organized. Yunus is only a list. The other five just go on.\item \item Panels:\\ {\TeX} in Europe, how can we obtain better acceptance? {\LaTeX}3: impressive history, no release dates of yet.\item \item Presentations:\\ Zlatu{\v s}ka's ACCENTS processor, for automatic generation of accented virtual fonts for European languages from English input fonts in the {\TeX} font layout, looks promising.\item \item Publishing houses:\\ MIR is involved. Springer is active and has some user guides out for a pilot journal. The Czech scientific journals are all formatted by {\TeX}!\item \item Products:\\ LAMS{\TeX} is still going public. Very promising though, especially the wizards manual.\item \end{itemize}}}} @ARTICLE{7-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{76-82}}, title = {{The TUG91 Annual Meeting}}, keywords = {{TUG conference}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{84}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{\begin{itemize} \item Education:\\ David Salomon is a great teacher: insights! He has donated his notes to TUG for inclusion in the {\TeX}niques series.\item \item Publishing houses:\\ The publishing houses accept (La){\TeX} copy. AMS leads with their total production formatted via {\TeX}: 90K pages per year.\item \item Interchange format:\\ DVI and Encapsulated PostScript!\item \item Workshops:\\ Modifying manmac was great! The ways of encapsulating PostScript are put together by Anita Hoover. (see elsewhere in MAPS)\item \item Products:\\ LAMS{\TeX} goes public. Arbor{\TeX}t has extended and improved their products. ETP, of Mimi Lafrenz, did steal the show.\item \end{itemize}}}} @ARTICLE{7-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{83-84}}, title = {{TUG Board of Directors meeting}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,board-of-directors}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{13}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The following are loosely formulated issues which were agreed upon. For more preciseness the reader is referred to the (approved) minutes.}}} @ARTICLE{7-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{85-86}}, title = {{Visit AMS and TUG office}}, keywords = {{AMS,TUG office}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{19}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A report is given of the role of AMS with respect to {\TeX} and TUG. The TUG office is next door and the cooperation is beneficial. A few relevant documents and the AMS preprint styles as well as the accompanying documentation are enumerated.}}} @ARTICLE{7-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{87-90}}, title = {{{\TeX}niques in Siberia}}, keywords = {{Siberia,{\LaTeX},courses,USSR}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{226}}, author = {{Theo Jurriens}}, names = {{Theo Jurriens}}, abstract = {{This article summarizes the problems of giving a {\LaTeX} course in Siberia. It concludes with an overview concerning the future of {\TeX} inside the USSR.}}} @ARTICLE{7-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{91-96}}, title = {{An Introduction to {\TeX} for New Users}}, keywords = {{introduction,new users}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{85}}, author = {{Alan Hoenig}}, names = {{Alan Hoenig}}, abstract = {{The purpose of this brief introduction is not to present a tutorial into the use of {\TeX}, but rather to introduce the user to the whole notion of what it means to use {\TeX}, how {\TeX} differs from other typesetting systems, and what the advantages are to using {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{7-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{97-101}}, title = {{Hoe met {\LaTeX} een boek kan worden gemaakt}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},book}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{55}}, author = {{Rein Smedinga}}, names = {{Rein Smedinga}}, abstract = {{Het cre\"eren van een boek met {\LaTeX} is geen vanzelfsprekende bezigheid. Onderstaand het relaasvan zo'n poging: het boek-in-wording Inleiding Informatica dat in eerste instantie als dictaat bij het bijbehorende college is geschreven en nu in een boekversie is aangeboden aan Addison-Wesley. In onderstaand betoog wordt voorbij gegaan aan het belangrijkste onderdeel van het schrijven van een boek: het schrijven van de tekst. We zullen het hier slechts hebben over de problemen en oplossingen voor wat betreft de layout.}}} @ARTICLE{7-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{102-104}}, title = {{Ladies and {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},non-scientists,simplification}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{34}}, author = {{Theo Jurriens}}, names = {{Theo Jurriens}}, abstract = {{This paper describes the use of {\LaTeX} by non-astronomers at the Kapteyn Institute. Although the general opinion is that it is too complicated for non-scientist, experience in Groningen proves otherwise. If you provide good tools or styles everybody is capable of using {\LaTeX}. Also, the astronomers took over tricks from the ladies, simplifying their lives, too.}}} @ARTICLE{7-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{105-110}}, title = {{Two Sides of the Fence}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,future}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{75}}, author = {{Nico Poppelier}}, names = {{Nico Poppelier}}, abstract = {{The purpose of this talk is to give an overview of the four days of the twelfth annual TUG meeting; it is an attempt to show that the different streams in the programme of the meeting are connected, that they are part of a whole. Also, I make some comments and observations regarding the current status and the future of {\TeX}, and the future of publishing in general.}}} @ARTICLE{7-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{111-116}}, title = {{Report on Workshop: Getting PostScript into {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} Documents}}, keywords = {{workshop,PostScript}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{62}}, author = {{Anita Hoover}}, names = {{Anita Hoover}}, } @ARTICLE{7-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{117-123}}, title = {{The TUGLIB Server}}, keywords = {{TUGLIB,FTP,mail,internet}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{76}}, author = {{Nelson Beebe}}, names = {{Nelson Beebe}}, abstract = {{Scores of sites on the worldwide Internet now provide access to assorted collections of software relating to {\TeX} and METAFONT. In many cases, these are accessible only via the Internet mechanism known as anonymous ftp, a scheme that permits logins from unknown users, usually on other machines, with very restricted access. The name ftp is an acronym for file transfer protocol. To improve the access to the {\TeX} archives and other software at Utah, I have installed `tuglib'. This server provides a means whereby remote users can send electronic mail messages containing service requests to a daemon program. The daemon parses the requests, logs them, and responds to them.}}} @ARTICLE{7-30, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{124}}, title = {{Self-replicating macros}}, keywords = {{macros,self-replication}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{14}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout, Ron Sommeling}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout, Ron Sommeling}}, } @ARTICLE{7-31, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{125-126}}, title = {{New books on {\TeX} (2)}}, keywords = {{new books,book review}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{26}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, abstract = {{Review of `A Beginner's Book of {\TeX}' (Kopka/Levy).}}} @ARTICLE{7-32, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{127-129}}, title = {{Impression INRS{\TeX}, and some more}}, keywords = {{INRS{\TeX}}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{38}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The work of Michael Fergusson on INRS{\TeX} is discussed, Michael's comments on the review are included.}}} @ARTICLE{7-33, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{130}}, title = {{AMS{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{AMS{\TeX}}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Ralph Youngen}}, names = {{Ralph Youngen}}, } @ARTICLE{7-34, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{131}}, title = {{LAMS{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{LAMS{\TeX}}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Michael Spivak}}, names = {{Michael Spivak}}, } @ARTICLE{7-35, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{132}}, title = {{Scholar{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{Scholar{\TeX}}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Yannis Haralambous}}, names = {{Yannis Haralambous}}, abstract = {{Scholar{\TeX} is a collection of fonts, macros, preprocessor, hyphenation patterns, other related software and a 150-pages manual with many illustrations, exemples, exercises and mottos. It's purpose is to allow the use of {\TeX} in the following languages: Greek, Epigraphical Greek, Armenian, Arabic, Hebrew, Syriac, Saxon, Old German, Phonetic Alphabet.}}} @ARTICLE{7-36, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{133-134}}, title = {{TUGboat, Table of Contents}}, keywords = {{TUGboat,contents}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{31}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Table of contents of TUGboat Volume 12.1 and 12.2.}}} @ARTICLE{7-37, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{135}}, title = {{`Insights in {\TeX}' course (1)}}, keywords = {{courses,insights}}, year = {{1991}}, volume = {{7}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{18}}, author = {{David Salomon}}, names = {{David Salomon}}, abstract = {{This course, with no hands-on, is aimed at {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} users who are ready for to acquire more insights into the {\TeX}nigma. For those who are still working at the `book' level an extra one-day introductory course can be organized if need for that is large enough.}}} @BOOK{maps8, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-150}}, title = {{MAPS 92.1}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{1628}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{8-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-4}}, title = {{Verslag (1992/1)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{51}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes, Jos Winnink}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes, Jos Winnink}}, abstract = {{Opening; Verslag bijeenkomst 2 mei 1991; Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen; Verslag/discussie werkgroepen; Rondvraag; NTG presentaties: `Fun with {\TeX}'; Sluiting.}}} @ARTICLE{8-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{5}}, title = {{{\TeX} kalender \& Glossary \& Aanschaf {\TeX} boeken}}, keywords = {{calendar,glossary,book}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{16}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{8-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{6}}, title = {{Werkgroepen NTG}}, keywords = {{working group}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{12}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}} @ARTICLE{8-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1992/1)}}, keywords = {{chairman}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, } @ARTICLE{8-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{8-10}}, title = {{Jaarverslag NTG 1991}}, keywords = {{report NTG}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{33}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{In 1991 ging de NTG zijn 4e jaar van bestaan in. Wederom verschenen er een tweetal MAPS (Minutes \& APpendiceS), twee NTG bijeenkomsten vonden plaats met een groeiend aantal lezingen, bestuursverkiezingen werden voor het eerst gehouden, een gecombineerd NTG/TUG lidmaatschap werd mogelijk, de samenwerking met Wiskundig Nederland kreeg gestalte, en er werd verdere aandacht besteed aan de continuering en acceptatie van de NTG.}}} @ARTICLE{8-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{11-12}}, title = {{Financieel verslag NTG 1991}}, keywords = {{financial report}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{26}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, } @ARTICLE{8-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-15}}, title = {{NTG's listserver {\TeX}-NL}}, keywords = {{listserver,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{18}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{8-8, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{16-22}}, title = {{NTG's fileserver {\TeX}-NL}}, keywords = {{fileserver}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{39}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}} @ARTICLE{8-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{23-24}}, title = {{WG 1: Education; Review Urban's `An introduction to {\LaTeX}'}}, keywords = {{review,book review}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{31}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Review of Michael Urban's `An introduction to {\LaTeX}'}}} @ARTICLE{8-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{25-30}}, title = {{WG 1: Education; Addendum `Publiceren met {\LaTeX}'}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX}}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{74}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Addendum `Publiceren met {\LaTeX}'}}} @ARTICLE{8-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{31-32}}, title = {{WG 4: Fonts: Met schuine en begerige ogen}}, keywords = {{working group,fonts}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{29}}, author = {{Erik-Jan Vens}}, names = {{Erik-Jan Vens}}, abstract = {{`Peremesjtsjenije', Een verhaal van nette armoei.}}} @ARTICLE{8-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{33-34}}, title = {{WG 7: PC-zaken}}, keywords = {{working group,PC,MS-DOS,Atari}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{13}}, author = {{Jos Winnink}}, names = {{Jos Winnink}}, abstract = {{Activiteiten van werkgroep 7: PC-zaken.}}} @ARTICLE{8-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{35-52}}, title = {{Music{\TeX}; using {\TeX} to write polyphonic or instrumental music}}, keywords = {{music}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{275}}, author = {{Daniel Taupin}}, names = {{Daniel Taupin}}, abstract = {{Music{\TeX} is a set of {\TeX} macros to typeset polyphonic, orchestral or polyphonic music.}}} @ARTICLE{8-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{53-56}}, title = {{Dating with {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{dates}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{18}}, author = {{Theo Jurriens}}, names = {{Theo Jurriens}}, abstract = {{Three {\TeX}-coded algorithms are given for performing tricks with dates.}}} @ARTICLE{8-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{57-58}}, title = {{Dag van het Document (verslag ITI-TNO informatiedag)}}, keywords = {{document,opslag en retrieval,ITI-TNO}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{22}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Een verslag van de dag van het document. Centraal stond de problematiek: opslag en retrieval van documenten. Interessant waren het begrip bibliotheek zonder muren, en de intelligente auteursomgevingen. Het dilemma ten aaanzien van het centrale theam is: moeten wij alles bewaren of selecteren en vergeten? Ook het forum kwam hier niet uit. Er was een beurs met een 20-tal stands.}}} @ARTICLE{8-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{59-62}}, title = {{Molecuul Muis Manuscript (verslag KNCV symposium)}}, keywords = {{chemistry,electronic publishing,KNCV}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{40}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{Op 18 oktober 1991 werd door de sectie Computertoepassingen van de KNCV (Koninklijke Nederlandse Chemische Vereniging) een symposium m.b.t. chemische tekstverwerking georganiseerd. Naast een algemene introductie over `Electronisch Publiceren', kregen zowel de Apple Macintosh als MS-DOS ge{\"\i}nteresseerden (chemici) de huidige mogelijkheden van het verwerken van chemische teksten voorgeschoteld. Het pakket {\TeX} kwam in een laatste lezing naar voren. De duidelijk geslaagde dag werd bezocht door een kleine honderd deelnemers, inclusief een tiental leveranciers. Vele (leerzame) demonstraties, zowel tijdens de lezingen, als ook tussen de lezingensessies door, zorgden mede voor een duidelijk overzicht.}}} @ARTICLE{8-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{63-80}}, title = {{An introduction to {\TeX} -- part I course David Salomon --}}, keywords = {{introduction}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{274}}, author = {{David Salomon}}, names = {{David Salomon}}, } @ARTICLE{8-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{81-86}}, title = {{The Components of {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{components of {\TeX}}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{67}}, author = {{Joachim Schrod}}, names = {{Joachim Schrod}}, abstract = {{{\TeX} needs a great amount of supplementary components (files and programs) of which the meaning and interaction often is unknown. This paper explains the components of the kernel system {\TeX} that are visible for the {\TeX} user and their relations.}}} @ARTICLE{8-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{87-90}}, title = {{{\LaTeX}3 project}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX}3}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{49}}, author = {{Frank Mittelbach}}, names = {{Frank Mittelbach}}, } @ARTICLE{8-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{91-114}}, title = {{{\LaTeX} Editing support}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},editing,emacs}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{237}}, author = {{Nelson Beebe}}, names = {{Nelson Beebe}}, abstract = {{The structured markup of {\LaTeX} can be easy to read and understand, but tedious to type. Its syntax of environment groups bears a strong resemblance to the begin/end groups of the Algol family of computer programming languages, which can be described by rigorous grammars that in turn permit the automatic construction of lexical analyzers and parsers, and structured editors to support programming in those languages. This article describes a powerful facility for the preparation of {\LaTeX} documents using the Emacs text editor.}}} @ARTICLE{8-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{115-116}}, title = {{Prolegomena toward a font selection scheme}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{34}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, abstract = {{Most users of plain {\TeX} do not get very sophisticated in their use of fonts. Often they resort to declaring all used fonts explicitly with \texttt{\font}. There are some obvious disadvantages to that: it is not possible to switch a whole document in a simple way to a different typeface, or to a different size. As a result, I've seen such phenomena as an article with an abstract in 8 or 9 point, but where the formulas were still in 10 point, or pages of `magnified' type where the lines were cramped, because the \texttt{\baselineskip} was not increased with the type size. The need for a good font selection scheme is thus quite obvious, but the implementation of one is not.}}} @ARTICLE{8-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{117-120}}, title = {{From observation to publication}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{68}}, author = {{Theo Jurriens}}, names = {{Theo Jurriens}}, abstract = {{This article describes the use of {\TeX} in publishing observations of variable stars observed by Dutch amateur-astronomers. The observations are published in the journal `Variabilia' and in the so-called Reports. In the latter the observations, collected in several years, are published and submitted to the professional astronomer. It includes tables and light-curves: plot of the changing magnitude of the star versus time. In creating the light-curves: PIC{\TeX} is used. In preparing the files for PIC{\TeX} simple {\TeX}-coding is used for manipulating the data.}}} @ARTICLE{8-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{121-124}}, title = {{FIFO and LIFO incognito}}, keywords = {{FIFO,LIFO}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{51}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{FIFO, first-in-first-out, and LIFO, last-in-last-out, are well-known techniques for handling sequences. In {\TeX} macro writing they are abundant but are not easily recognized as such. {\TeX} templates for FIFO and LIFO are given and their use is illustrated.}}} @ARTICLE{8-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{125-127}}, title = {{Tower of Hanoi}}, keywords = {{tower of Hanoi}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{49}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Another version of programming `The Tower of Hanoi' in {\TeX} is provided. No nodding knowledge of Lisp is required; just plain {\TeX}. There is no restriction on the number of disks, apart from the installed limits of {\TeX}. Generalized disks can be moved as well.}}} @ARTICLE{8-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{128-132}}, title = {{Typesetting Crosswords via {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{crosswords,\halign,WYSIWYG,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{59}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A macro is provided for typesetting crosswords via (plain) {\TeX}, or any {\TeX}, which allows \texttt{\halign} use. The specification of the crossword information can be done in the WYSIWYG way, and does not require \texttt{\halign} markup, just the data.}}} @ARTICLE{8-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{133-134}}, title = {{Ladies \& {\LaTeX} -- II}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{31}}, author = {{Theo Jurriens}}, names = {{Theo Jurriens}}, abstract = {{In dit artikel wordt mijn ervaring als {\LaTeX}-docent, vraagbaak voor secretaresses beschreven. Er zijn twee bronnen van problemen: organisatie en {\TeX}-techniek.}}} @ARTICLE{8-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{135-138}}, title = {{Book reviews}}, keywords = {{book review,SGML}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{56}}, author = {{Nico Poppelier, Amy Hendrickson}}, names = {{Nico Poppelier, Amy Hendrickson}}, abstract = {{Reviews of `{\LaTeX} for Everyone' (Jane Hahn), `Practical SGML' (Eric van Herwijnen), `{\TeX} by Topic, A {\TeX}nician's Reference' (Victor Eijkhout).}}} @ARTICLE{8-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{139-142}}, title = {{Spivak's Oeuvre}}, keywords = {{LAMS{\TeX}}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{62}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Spivak's `The Joy of {\TeX}' and `LAMS{\TeX} -- The Synthesis' are discussed.}}} @ARTICLE{8-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{143-144}}, title = {{TUGboat, Table of Contents}}, keywords = {{TUGboat}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{35}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Table of contents of TUGboat Volume 12.3, 12.4 and 13.1.}}} @ARTICLE{8-30, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{145-146}}, title = {{Tijdschriften zusterverenigingen}}, keywords = {{journals}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{31}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{8-31, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{147-148}}, title = {{Euro{\TeX}92 announcement}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},conference,announcement,Prague}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{22}}, author = {{Ji{\v r}{\'\i} Vesely}}, names = {{Ji{\v r}{\'\i} Vesely}}, abstract = {{Announcement of the Euro{\TeX}'92 conference.}}} @ARTICLE{8-32, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{149-150}}, title = {{`Insights in {\TeX}' course (2)}}, keywords = {{courses}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{8}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{27}}, author = {{David Salomon}}, names = {{David Salomon}}, abstract = {{This advanced course, with no hands-on, is aimed at those {\TeX} and/or {\LaTeX} users who are ready for a deeper insight into the {\TeX}nigma. An extra one-day introductory course can be organized for inexperienced users, if there is enough demand.}}} @BOOK{maps9, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-162}}, title = {{MAPS 92.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{2054}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{9-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-4}}, title = {{Verslag (1992/2)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{61}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes, Jos Winnink}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes, Jos Winnink}}, abstract = {{Opening; Verslag bijeenkomst 21 november 1991; Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen; NTG jaarvergadering; Verslag/discussie werkgroepen; Rondvraag; NTG presentaties: `{\TeX} and Scientific Publishing'; Sluiting.}}} @ARTICLE{9-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{5}}, title = {{{\TeX} kalender \& Glossary \& Discount boeken en software voor NTG leden}}, keywords = {{calendar,glossary,book,software}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{23}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{9-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{6}}, title = {{Werkgroepen NTG}}, keywords = {{working group}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{12}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}} @ARTICLE{9-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7-8}}, title = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1992)}}, keywords = {{MAPS}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{38}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{9-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{9-11}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1992/2)}}, keywords = {{chairman}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{47}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, } @ARTICLE{9-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{12}}, title = {{Concept begroting 1993}}, keywords = {{budget}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, } @ARTICLE{9-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-15}}, title = {{NTG's listserver {\TeX}-NL}}, keywords = {{listserver,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{22}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{9-8, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{16-22}}, title = {{NTG's fileserver {\TeX}-NL}}, keywords = {{fileserver}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{43}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}} @ARTICLE{9-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{23-30}}, title = {{WG 3: Evaluatie; Formules in WP5.1, DECwrite en {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{formulas,evaluation,WordPerfect,DECwrite,{\LaTeX}}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{173}}, author = {{Huub Mulders}}, names = {{Huub Mulders}}, abstract = {{De pakketten WP5.1, DECwrite en {\LaTeX} bieden de mogelijkheid om formules te typesetten. Om de mogelijkheden en kwaliteit te kunnen beoordelen is geprobeerd een vijftal formules met behulp van de drie pakketten te maken.}}} @ARTICLE{9-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{31-32}}, title = {{WG 4: Fonts; Hoe maak ik van een font twee fonts?}}, keywords = {{working group,fonts,virtual fonts}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Erik-Jan Vens}}, names = {{Erik-Jan Vens}}, abstract = {{Andrea de Leeuw van Weenen wilde een deel van haar zelfgemaakte font aan kunnen spreken met de gewone letters op het toetsenbord, en niet met lastig in te typen en (evt.) lastig te onthouden macros. De aangewezen manier leek het maken van een virtueel font. Dus heb ik eens op een rijtje gezet wat je daarvoor nodig hebt.}}} @ARTICLE{9-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{33-36}}, title = {{7th European {\TeX} Conference: Euro{\TeX}'92}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},conference,Prague}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{53}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Highlights of this Euro{\TeX}'92 at Prague were: \begin{itemize} \item Graphics via {\TeX} and METAFONT.\item \item = METAFONT with PostScript output.\item \item PostScript fonts coupled to {\TeX}.\item \item What every advisory service should know.\item \item As{\TeX} as model for a scientific workbench.\item \item Several (free) tutorials: Advanced {\TeX}, Virtual fonts, XY-PiC.\item \end{itemize}}}} @ARTICLE{9-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{37-42}}, title = {{Verslag van de TUG conferentie in Portland, Oregon}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,Portland}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{68}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, abstract = {{Verslag van de TUG conferentie in Portland, Oregon.}}} @ARTICLE{9-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{43-49}}, title = {{The Key to Successful Support: Knowing Your {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} Users}}, keywords = {{user support}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{80}}, author = {{Anita Hoover}}, names = {{Anita Hoover}}, abstract = {{The primary emphasis of this paper is to address the issues related to supporting {\TeX} and {\LaTeX}. One essential ingredient to successfully supporting any package is that you must know your users. In the case of {\TeX} and {\LaTeX}, this is especially true, because the user base can be so diverse. This paper will focus on support strategies that address different types of users and what you can do as a {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} support person to adopt these strategies in your organization.}}} @ARTICLE{9-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{50-56}}, title = {{The Pursuit of Quality}}, keywords = {{craft typography,automated typesetting,document formatting models,paradigm,typographic rules,visual contexts,logical contexts,global optimization}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{80}}, author = {{Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley}}, names = {{Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley}}, abstract = {{This paper compares high-quality craft typography with the state of the art in automated typesetting. The first part discusses several typographical conventions which cannot be implemented by means of any formatting model currently in use. The second part explains why the current paradigms of computerized typesetting will not serve for high-quality formatting and suggests directions for the further research necessary to improve the quality of computer generated layout.}}} @ARTICLE{9-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{57-62}}, title = {{Writing Reports with More than a Hundred People}}, keywords = {{automated report writing,{\LaTeX}}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{145}}, author = {{Walter van der Laan, Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Walter van der Laan, Johannes Braams}}, abstract = {{This paper describes a system that produces project status reports using {\LaTeX}. The reports contain both textual and financial information. The textual part of the status reports is written by over a hundred people who don't need to know what {\LaTeX} is. The financial information is retrieved from a database.}}} @ARTICLE{9-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{63-68}}, title = {{{\TeX}-based Production at the AMS}}, keywords = {{AMS}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{96}}, author = {{Ralph Youngen}}, names = {{Ralph Youngen}}, abstract = {{The American Mathematical Society (AMS) is a both major publisher of mathematical research, and a professional organization whose members are mathematicians engaging in research at academic institutions and other research centers in the U.S. and around the world. A primary function of the Society is to provide channels of communication whereby these mathematicians can communicate the results of their research to each other, and to the broader scientific community. Foremost among these channels of communication is an extensive publications program which is based on the {\TeX} typesetting system.}}} @ARTICLE{9-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{69-80}}, title = {{Standard dtd's and Scientific Publishing}}, keywords = {{DTD,SGML,scientific publishing}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{143}}, author = {{Nico Poppelier, Eric van Herwijnen, Chris Rowley}}, names = {{Nico Poppelier, Eric van Herwijnen, Chris Rowley}}, abstract = {{This paper has two parts. In the first part we argue that scientific publishing needs one standard dtd for each class of documents that is published, for example one for all research papers and one for all books. In the second part we apply this reasoning to mathematical formulas, and we outline some design requirements for a document type definition for mathematical formulas. In the appendices we discuss and compare existing document type definitions for mathematical formulas.}}} @ARTICLE{9-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{81-84}}, title = {{Incorporating PostScript fonts in {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{PostScript,fonts,pfb2mf,conversion}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{58}}, author = {{Erik-Jan Vens}}, names = {{Erik-Jan Vens}}, abstract = {{pfb2mf provides the {\TeX} community with an interface to the PostScript Type One fonts. There is an overwhelming amount of these fonts for sale and there are a lot of fonts in the Public Domain, so it extends the range of typefaces the {\TeX} user can choose from.}}} @ARTICLE{9-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{85-88}}, title = {{Creating Shaded Rectangles with PostScript}}, keywords = {{shaded rectangles,PostScript}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{36}}, author = {{David Salomon}}, names = {{David Salomon}}, abstract = {{One of the most common graphics used in documents is text with a shaded background. This is hard to do with {\TeX} but easy with PostScript. Simple PostScript code is presented here to create shaded rectangles, and a macro is developed to combine such a rectangle with text.}}} @ARTICLE{9-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{89-96}}, title = {{Introduction to METAPOST}}, keywords = {{METAFONT,METAPOST,picture drawing}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{110}}, author = {{John Hobby}}, names = {{John Hobby}}, abstract = {{METAPOST is a picture-drawing language very much like METAFONT except with PostScript output. The language provides access to all major features of Level 1 PostScript and it has facilities for integrating graphics with typeset text. This paper gives a brief overview of the METAPOST language and how it can be used. A few of the more interesting features are described in detail.}}} @ARTICLE{9-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{97-99}}, title = {{{\TeX} for Everyone!?}}, keywords = {{METAFONT,PostScript}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{48}}, author = {{Theo Jurriens}}, names = {{Theo Jurriens}}, abstract = {{In this article author tries to defend a more general use of {\TeX} outside the world of mathematics, astronomy, physics etc. The ! or ? in the title of this paper is the question. Several examples are shown why {\TeX} is much powerful than a dull word-processing package.}}} @ARTICLE{9-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{100-101}}, title = {{{\TeX} als Database}}, keywords = {{databases,administration}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{15}}, author = {{Theo Jurriens}}, names = {{Theo Jurriens}}, abstract = {{In dit artikel wordt beschreven hoe {\TeX} is gebruikt als een primitieve database voor de administratie van de 47ste Nederlandse Astronomen Conferentie.}}} @ARTICLE{9-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{102-104}}, title = {{Ladies and {\LaTeX} -- III Vragen allerlei!}}, keywords = {{floats,multi-columns,letter,table of contents}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{24}}, author = {{Theo Jurriens}}, names = {{Theo Jurriens}}, abstract = {{In het dagelijks gebruik van {\LaTeX} komen we zo af en toe toch nog wel eens problemen voor. In dit artikel vragen uit de praktijk en de mogelijke oplossingen.}}} @ARTICLE{9-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{105-110}}, title = {{Just give me a Lollipop (it makes my heart go giddy-up)}}, keywords = {{Lollipop,meta-format,style design}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{66}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, abstract = {{The Lollipop format is a meta-format: it does not define user macros, but it contains the tools with which a style designer can easily implement such user macros. This article will show some of the capabilities of Lollipop and will give the reader a small peek behind the scenes of the implementation.}}} @ARTICLE{9-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{111-114}}, title = {{Index Preparation for {\TeX} Related Documents}}, keywords = {{index preparation,MakeIndex}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{50}}, author = {{David Salomon}}, names = {{David Salomon}}, abstract = {{A beta release of the MakeIndex program has recently become available for the Macintosh computer, and I immediately started using it to prepare the indexes of two new books. MakeIndex is easy to use with {\LaTeX} but, since I like to work with plain {\TeX}, I have developed all the necessary macros from scratch. They are presented here for the benefit of anyone who wants a professionally looking index.}}} @ARTICLE{9-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{115-129}}, title = {{Table Diversions}}, keywords = {{tables,bordered table,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{133}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Characteristics of existing table macro collections are given. A kaleidoscope of tables -- as next best to a taxonomy -- is presented. Newly introduced is the class of bordered tables. Variations in print-ruled, nonruled, framed, nonframed, dotted, centered, flushed-can be obtained via the invoke of parameter setting macros; no modification of user mark up. Simultaneous row and column spans, partial rules, and dotted lines are dealt with. The listing of the macro \texttt{\btable}, with auxiliaries, is included.}}} @ARTICLE{9-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{130-136}}, title = {{Syntactic Sugar}}, keywords = {{array addressing,loops,parameters,linear search,sorting,switch,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{101}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A plea is made for being honest with {\TeX} and not imposing alien structures upon it, otherwise than via compatible extensions, or via (non-{\TeX}) user interfaces to suit the publisher, the author, or the typist. This will facilitate the process to get (complex) publications out effectively, and typographically of high-quality.}}} @ARTICLE{9-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{137-138}}, title = {{Heap Sort in {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{heap sort,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{40}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Sorting in plain {\TeX} is implemented via heap sort. The heap sort algorithm is explained and the encoding given.}}} @ARTICLE{9-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{139-144}}, title = {{FIFO and LIFO sing the BLUes}}, keywords = {{FIFO,LIFO,BLUe,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{89}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{FIFO, First-In-First-Out, and LIFO, Last-In-First-Out, are well-known techniques for handling sequences. In {\TeX} macro writing they are abundant but are not easily recognized as such. {\TeX} templates for FIFO and LIFO are given and their use illustrated. The relation with Knuth's \texttt{\dolist}, answer ex11.5, and \texttt{\ctest}, p.376, is given.}}} @ARTICLE{9-30, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{145-146}}, title = {{Typesetting Crosswords via {\TeX}, revisited}}, keywords = {{crosswords}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{43}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{An alternative macro, to van der Laan (1992b), is provided for typesetting crosswords via {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{9-31, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{147-154}}, title = {{Scientific Word; {\TeX} \`a la WYSIWYG}}, keywords = {{Scientific Word,WYSIWYG,Windows,OS2WIN}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{244}}, author = {{Jan Krugers}}, names = {{Jan Krugers}}, abstract = {{A software package for Windows and OS2WIN for inputting mathematical formulas WYSIWYG according to all {\TeX} rules. Internal storage format is a mixture of {\TeX}, {\LaTeX} and macros of own design. Mathematical formulas are immediately shown the way they will be printed. Line width for text is limited to the width of the windowfor ease of use. The built in previewer from Turbo{\TeX} shows the whole document layout. There are also dvi drivers included for PostScript, LaserJet, DeskJet and matrixprinters. Pictures can be called just as easy as formulas can be inputted. A description of the philosophy of this package and how to work with it.}}} @ARTICLE{9-32, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{155-157}}, title = {{Bugs (sigh) in Knuths `Computers \& Typesetting'}}, keywords = {{bugs,Knuth,Computers \& Typesetting}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{38}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{In may/june this year a discussion started on the {\TeX}-NL listserver (by Kees van der Laan and Nico Poppelier) about the releases of Knuths book series: it was not sure that Addison-Wesley was selling only the latest book editions. We have forwarded that discussion directly to Addison-Wesley in Amsterdam. The answer is included in next section.}}} @ARTICLE{9-33, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{158}}, title = {{{\LaTeX}3; Call for Volunteers}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX}3,volunteers}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{17}}, author = {{Michael Downes}}, names = {{Michael Downes}}, abstract = {{This is a call for volunteers to help in the development of {\LaTeX}3. There are many tasks needing to be done in support of the {\LaTeX}3 project which can be worked on concurrently with the development of the {\LaTeX}3 kernel. Furthermore, some tasks require special expertise not found among the core programming team. Initial research, analysis, and work on these tasks by volunteers can greatly speed up the process of integrating a number of desirable features into {\LaTeX}3. Many of these features can be extensively developed and tested under {\LaTeX} 2.09 even before the {\LaTeX}3 kernel is available.}}} @ARTICLE{9-34, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{159}}, title = {{Euro{\TeX}'92 proceedings}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},proceedings,Prague}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{16}}, author = {{Ji{\v r}{\'\i} Zlatu{\v s}ka}}, names = {{Ji{\v r}{\'\i} Zlatu{\v s}ka}}, abstract = {{Euro{\TeX} '92 proceedings volume contains 330 pages of papers presented at the last European {\TeX} Conference held in Prague, Czechoslovakia. There are full texts of five invited talks included, presenting topics ranging from the future of {\TeX} to combinations involving METAFONT and PostScript, and also user support. The volume is available from the Czechoslovak {\TeX} user's group for only DM 30.--.}}} @ARTICLE{9-35, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{160}}, title = {{TUG '93; Call for Papers}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,call for papers}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{56}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Call for papers for TUG'93 meeting.}}} @ARTICLE{9-36, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{161-162}}, title = {{Table of Contents TUGboat}}, keywords = {{TUGboat,contents}}, year = {{1992}}, volume = {{9}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{24}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Table of contents of TUGboat Volume 13.2 and 13.3.}}} @BOOK{maps10, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-218}}, title = {{MAPS 93.1}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{3082}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{10-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-4}}, title = {{Verslag (1993)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{49}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes, Jos Winnink}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes, Jos Winnink}}, abstract = {{Opening; Verslag bijeenkomst 4 juni 1992; Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen; NTG presentaties: `The future of {\TeX}/{\LaTeX}'; Rondvraag en Sluiting.}}} @ARTICLE{10-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{5-6}}, title = {{{\TeX} kalender, Glossary \& Mededelingen}}, keywords = {{calendar,glossary,announcement}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{23}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{10-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7-10}}, title = {{Van uw MAPS Editor; `5 jaar MAPS'}}, keywords = {{MAPS,MAPS,NTG}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{60}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{10-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{11-14}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1993/1)}}, keywords = {{chairman}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{55}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, } @ARTICLE{10-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{15-17}}, title = {{Jaarverslag NTG 1992}}, keywords = {{report NTG}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{29}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{In 1992 ging de NTG zijn 5e jaar van bestaan in. Twee NTG bijeenkomsten vonden plaats met vele goede lezingen, naast een succesvolle en goed bezette 5-daagse Advanced {\TeX} cursus (low budget; met het cursusmateriaal als MAPS-Special). Er verschenen wederom een tweetal MAPS uitgaven (Minutes \& APpendiceS). Medewerking werd tevens verleend aan het {\LaTeX}3 projekt.\\ En voor de rest is er het diverse door de leden gedaan waaronder een Public Domain MS-DOS set (instap en volledige versie), proeflezen van de MAPS, en de hulpverlening bij vragen op de {\TeX}-NL discussielijst.}}} @ARTICLE{10-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{18-19}}, title = {{Financieel verslag NTG 1992}}, keywords = {{financial report}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{24}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, } @ARTICLE{10-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{20-22}}, title = {{NTG's Listserver {\TeX}-NL}}, keywords = {{listserver,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{19}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{10-8, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{23-30}}, title = {{NTG's Fileserver {\TeX}-NL}}, keywords = {{fileserver}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{40}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}} @ARTICLE{10-9, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{31-36}}, title = {{NTG's Bulletin Board FGBBS}}, keywords = {{BBS,bulletin board,FGBBS}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{58}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Nieuw voor de Nederlandstalige {\TeX} Gebruikersgroep: een {\TeX} Bulletin Board speciaal voor diegenen die niet op het Internet zijn aangesloten. De naam: FGBBS. Op FGBBS is sinds kort een zo volledig en actueel mogelijke {\TeX}, em{\TeX}, {\LaTeX} en Music{\TeX} collectie beschikbaar voor alle bezitters van een modem. Het BBS is kosteloos toegankelijk voor iedereen en er zijn geen beperkingen aan de hoeveelheid bestanden die kunnen worden opgevraagd. Het systeem is aangesloten op een High Speed modem, vergeleken met de transmissiesnelheid die een directe Internet link biedt misschien niet geweldig, maar veel beter kan het niet over de gewone huis- tuin- en keukenPTTlijn. FGBBS is te bellen op 085-217041. Noot 31-jan-1997: nieuw nummer is 026-3217 041.}}} @ARTICLE{10-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{37-40}}, title = {{A Catalogue of {\TeX} Macros}}, keywords = {{{\TeX},{\LaTeX},AMS{\TeX},AMS{\LaTeX},macros,index}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{39}}, author = {{David Jones}}, names = {{David Jones}}, abstract = {{This is a catalogue of {\TeX} macros. Its scope includes all macros that are available via anonymous ftp or mail-server or some similar mechanism. Commercial packages will be included only if a full Catalogue entry is supplied to me by the vendor.}}} @ARTICLE{10-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{41-52}}, title = {{A way to ensure the future of {\TeX}: make its use easier on low-cost machines}}, keywords = {{back-end,front-end,scientific publishing,As{\TeX},hyper{\TeX},tree,link,multi-author document,file manager,numerical computation,formal computation,worksheet,databases,email,MS-DOS,notebook,OS/2}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{436}}, author = {{Michel Lavaud}}, names = {{Michel Lavaud}}, abstract = {{The PC is the cheapest computer and the most widespread one in the scientific community. Faced with commercial scientific word-processors that are improving steadily in wrong directions, it is urgent to make the use of {\TeX} easier on the PC, to ensure its future and avoid costly dead-ends to researchers. We have designed a program, As{\TeX}, that allows to create easily multi-author scientific documents in {\TeX} or {\LaTeX} on PCs. It provides an on-line hypertext help and a multi-level assistance in typing {\LaTeX} code. It allows to display and modify very easily the structure of a document, to archive and retrieve files related to it, to perform numerical and formal computations from the document and include automatically the results, to create {\LaTeX} tables from worksheets or databases of formulas. It processes electronic mail and files sent by list servers for a better use of information and eases considerably the use of anonymous ftp and archie servers by local archiving of selected informations.}}} @ARTICLE{10-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{53-56}}, title = {{4{\TeX}: a {\TeX} Workbench for MS-DOS PC's}}, keywords = {{4{\TeX},workbench,PC,MS-DOS,freeware,shareware}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{58}}, author = {{Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach, Maarten van der Vlerk}}, names = {{Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach, Maarten van der Vlerk}}, abstract = {{{\TeX} and all its companions offer an enormous amount of possibilities. This is both an advantage and a disadvantage. The advantage is that almost anything is possible; the disadvantage is that you need detailed knowledge of all related programs to fully exploit the possibilities. The MS-DOS program 4{\TeX} is an attempt to integrate all major {\TeX} related programs in a shell that shields you from the tedious and frustrating job of setting environment variables and program parameters.}}} @ARTICLE{10-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{57-68}}, title = {{{\TeX} zonder omhaal; voor Atari ST en andere PC's (I)}}, keywords = {{Atari,PD-{\TeX}}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{196}}, author = {{Robert Best}}, names = {{Robert Best}}, abstract = {{Deze cursus is bedoeld als eerste kennismaking met {\TeX} op een eenvoudige PC. Een harde schijf is niet nodig. De cursus is gebaseerd op de PD-{\TeX} van Christoph Strunk voor Atari ST. De installatie en de functie van de basis bestanden van {\TeX} worden behandeld. Deze cursus is een gecorrigeerde herdruk van een serie artikelen in het blad ST uitgegeven door: Stichting ST. Daar zijn de in de tekst genoemde schijfjes te verkrijgen.}}} @ARTICLE{10-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{69-72}}, title = {{Gezeefd uit de {\TeX}-NL discussielijst (1993/1)}}, keywords = {{TEX-NL,discussionlist}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{37}}, author = {{Philippe Vanoverbeke}}, names = {{Philippe Vanoverbeke}}, abstract = {{Gezeefd uit de NTG {\TeX}-NL discussielijst van 1992 en begin 1993: een zestiental vragen en antwoorden. Niet alleen voor de niet-netwerkers doch ook voor de {\TeX}-NL subscribers die de berichten te snel langs hun heen zagen gaan. Keuze is gemaakt op persoonlijke titel, veel is dus ongetwijfeld missende. Echter de onderwerpen welke in deze bijdrage worden behandeld zijn zeker van algemeen belang.}}} @ARTICLE{10-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{73}}, title = {{arm{\TeX}, een port van {\TeX} voor de Archimedes}}, keywords = {{arm{\TeX},Acorn,Archimedes,port}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{16}}, author = {{Mark Sinke}}, names = {{Mark Sinke}}, abstract = {{In dit artikeltje zal ik vertellen wat arm{\TeX} is en welke voor- en nadelen het systeem heeft. Het is geen uitvoerige opsomming van wat {\TeX} kan, omdat de lezer geacht wordt daarvan (enigszins) op de hoogte te zijn. Ik zal me meer richten op de technische kanten van het werken met {\TeX} op de Archimedes.}}} @ARTICLE{10-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{74-76}}, title = {{Het gebruik van MathTime in {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{MathTime,{\LaTeX}}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{106}}, author = {{Piet Tutelaers}}, names = {{Piet Tutelaers}}, } @ARTICLE{10-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{77-85}}, title = {{The Future of {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{extended {\TeX},NTS,New Typesetting System}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{126}}, author = {{Philip Taylor}}, names = {{Philip Taylor}}, abstract = {{{\TeX} and the other members of Knuth's Computers \& Typesetting family are arguably amongst the most successful examples of computer software in the world, having been ported to almost every conceivable operating system and attracting an allegiance that verges on the fanatical. Development work on this family has now ceased, and many members of the computer typesetting community are concerned that some action should be taken to ensure that the ideas and philosophy enshrined in {\TeX} are not allowed simply to fade away. In this paper, we discuss some of the options available for perpetuating the {\TeX} philosophy, and examine the strengths and weaknesses of the present {\TeX} system. We conclude by postulating a development strategy for the future which will honour both the letter and the spirit of Knuth's wish that {\TeX}, METAFONT and the Computer Modern typefaces remain his sole responsibility, and at the same time ensure that the philosophy and paradigms which are the strengths of {\TeX} are not lost for ever by having artificial constraints placed on their evolution.}}} @ARTICLE{10-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{86-94}}, title = {{E-{\TeX}: Guidelines for Future {\TeX} extensions}}, keywords = {{e-{\TeX},guidelines,extensions}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{256}}, author = {{Frank Mittelbach}}, names = {{Frank Mittelbach}}, abstract = {{With the announcement of {\TeX} 3.0, Don Knuth acknowledged the need of the (ever growing) {\TeX} community for an even better system. But at the same time, he made it clear, that he will not get involved in any further enhancements that would change the {\TeX}book. {\TeX} started out originally as a system designed to typeset its author's own publications. In the meantime it serves hundreds of thousands of users. Now it is time, after ten years' experience, to step back and consider whether or not {\TeX} 3.0 is an adequate answer to the typesetting requirements of the nineties. Output produced by {\TeX} has higher standards than output generated automatically by most other typesetting systems. Therefore, in this paper we will focus on the quality standards set by typographers for hand-typeset documents and ask to what extent they are achieved by {\TeX}. Limitations of {\TeX}'s algorithms are analyzed; and missing features as well as new concepts are outlined.}}} @ARTICLE{10-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{95-100}}, title = {{The {\LaTeX}3 Project}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX}3}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{61}}, author = {{Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley}}, names = {{Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley}}, abstract = {{This is a brief sketch of the {\LaTeX}3 Project: background, history, principles, aims and functionality. The new version of {\LaTeX} is, like the current version, a freely available system for automated processing of structured documents, formatting them to the highest typographic standards by use of the {\TeX} typesetting software. Although its uses include a very large range of published documents, the importance of its unsurpassed ability to format mathematical formulas will not be forgotten in producing the new version. It is being produced by an international group of volunteers under the technical direction of Frank Mittelbach.}}} @ARTICLE{10-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{101-113}}, title = {{PostScript en {\LaTeX}, de komplementariteit in praktijk}}, keywords = {{PostScript,{\LaTeX},epsfig,NFSS}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{225}}, author = {{Michel Goossens}}, names = {{Michel Goossens}}, abstract = {{In dit artikel toon ik aan hoe PostScript en {\LaTeX} een hoge graad van samenhorigheid bezitten, die het mogelijk maakt om de voordelen van beide systemen te kombineren om dokumenten elektronisch te publiceren. Allereerst vertel ik hoe, samen met de dvi-vertaler dvips en het stijlbestand epsfig, het invoegen van PostScript materiaal in een (La){\TeX} bestand heel eenvoudig wordt. Samen met de stijl rotating kan men bijna elk gewenst globaal grafisch effekt verkrijgen zonder per-se een PostScript guru te zijn. In het tweede gedeelte van het artikel geef ik een kort overzicht van enkele op PostScript gebaseerde stijlbestanden, die bepaalde nuttige visuele effekten genereren, zoals grijze raampjes, kleurentypografie en het overdrukken van tekst. In het laatste gedeelte toon ik hoe eenvoudig het is om PostScript fonts te gebruiken in {\LaTeX} met het nieuwe fontselektie systeem (NFSS) van Frank Mittelbach.}}} @ARTICLE{10-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{114-119}}, title = {{Virtual Fonts: Great Fun, Not for Wizards Only}}, keywords = {{virtual fonts}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{122}}, author = {{Yannis Haralambous}}, names = {{Yannis Haralambous}}, abstract = {{This paper deals with virtual fonts. I would like to present some examples of their astonishing possibilities, taken from everyday typesetting (or almost).}}} @ARTICLE{10-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{120-123}}, title = {{The Birth of a Virtual Font; The AdjKerns Utility}}, keywords = {{virtual fonts,AdjKerns}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{41}}, author = {{Yannis Haralambous}}, names = {{Yannis Haralambous}}, } @ARTICLE{10-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{124-139}}, title = {{When {\TeX} and METAFONT Work Together}}, keywords = {{METAFONT,labelling figures,figures with labels,curvilinear}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{279}}, author = {{Alan Hoenig}}, names = {{Alan Hoenig}}, abstract = {{When {\TeX} and METAFONT communicate to each other, they can do more together than they can alone. This presentation concentrates on two illustrations of this principal, and urges readers to come up with more. When {\TeX} becomes sensitive to information passed to it from METAFONT, it is possible to prepare diagrams and figures using METAFONT and then to have {\TeX} prepare labels which can be precisely positioned within the figure. When communication goes the other way, {\TeX} and METAFONT can prepare special purpose fonts which (among other things) can be set along curved baselines. Illustrations of both techniques are presented.}}} @ARTICLE{10-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{140-141}}, title = {{Getallen}}, keywords = {{numbers}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{25}}, author = {{David van Leeuwen}}, names = {{David van Leeuwen}}, } @ARTICLE{10-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{142-144}}, title = {{International quotations}}, keywords = {{quotation marks}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{28}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, abstract = {{In this article some relatively simple macros are presented for people who need an occasional quotation mark that is different from the default quotation marks provided by {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{10-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{145-148}}, title = {{Typesetting number sequences; FIFO and some more}}, keywords = {{typesetting sequences,citation lists,lists of references,linear sorting,FIFO,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{68}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Typesetting sequences of numerical values, represented via symbolic names which get their values on the fly, is dealt with. The sorting of the sequence is done by a linear sorting algorithm, of complexity O(n2). Three or more consecutive numbers are typeset as a range. The objective was to encode typesetting sequences of numbers as simple, concise, general, compatible, modular, orthogonal, and ..., as possible in {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{10-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{149-170}}, title = {{Sorting in BLUe}}, keywords = {{sorting,index preparation,database handling,multiple sorting keys}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{259}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Macros for number and lexicographic sorting are supplied. Data can originate from the copy, from file, or generated automatically. Lexicographic sorting allows words with ligatures and diacritical marks. Applications treated are: sorting with respect to report generation with {\TeX} as a database tool, sorting and compressing index.{\TeX}, Knuth's index reminders file, and sorting control sequences separately. It is illustrated by various examples that a set can be sorted within {\TeX} once the ordering of the set is defined and encoded in a comparison macro, in compliance with the parameter macro \texttt{\cmp}.}}} @ARTICLE{10-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{171-191}}, title = {{Manmac BLUes; or how to typeset a book via {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{computer-assisted typography,manmac,style,customizing,index preparation,plain {\TeX},fonts}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{227}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The manmac macros are enumerated. A user's guide is provided, and the encodings are explained. As enhancements the writing of index reminders to the file index.{\TeX} is elaborated upon, and how to incorporate AMS fonts and non-CM fonts is referred to. In the appendixes I provided the source of manmac and my personalized report template. With respect to the latter, I played with the idea of formatting the MAPS specials series in this way.}}} @ARTICLE{10-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{192-212}}, title = {{AMS BLUes; professionals at work}}, keywords = {{computer-assisted typography,math,bibliography,markup,AMS{\TeX},math fonts,cyrillics,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{234}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The significance of the American Mathematical Society for the {\TeX} community at large, and more general the leading role of the AMS in the area of professional computer-assisted typesetting, is praised. AMS-{\TeX}, AMS-{\LaTeX}, their accompanying styles amsppt.sty, respectively amsart.sty, as well as AMS fonts are discussed. AMS provides excellent user's and installation guides along with the software and fonts, all in the public domain. Despite the quality, an alternative approach -- and in detail some alternative encodings -- are provided. A publisher is strongly encouraged to take notice of the computer-assisted publishing activities of this pace-setting society. A new procedural idea with respect to specifying and formatting bibliographies, given a background file of all the references an author is familiar with, is proposed to suit the author and the publisher.}}} @ARTICLE{10-30, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{213-216}}, title = {{The 14th Annual {\TeX} Users Group Meeting}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,Aston}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{53}}, author = {{Sebastian Rahtz}}, names = {{Sebastian Rahtz}}, abstract = {{`A World-Wide Window on {\TeX}'}}} @ARTICLE{10-31, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{217-218}}, title = {{Table of Contents TUGboat}}, keywords = {{TUGboat,contents}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{10}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{19}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Table of contents of TUGboat Volume 13.4.}}} @BOOK{maps11, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-227}}, title = {{MAPS 93.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{2629}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{11-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-6}}, title = {{Opening 11e NTG bijeenkomst 10 juni 1993}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{88}}, author = {{Jos Winnink}}, names = {{Jos Winnink}}, abstract = {{Verslag bijeenkomst 19 november 1992; Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen; NTG-jaarvergadering; Rondvraag en Sluiting; Voordrachten: `Van font tot boek'; Volgende bijeenkomsten}}} @ARTICLE{11-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7-8}}, title = {{Het weten waard}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{35}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{11-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{9-10}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1993/2)}}, keywords = {{chairman}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{23}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, } @ARTICLE{11-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{11}}, title = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1993)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{22}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{11-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{12-13}}, title = {{Concept begroting 1994}}, keywords = {{budget}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{17}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, } @ARTICLE{11-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{14-16}}, title = {{NTG's Listserver {\TeX}-NL}}, keywords = {{listserver,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{30}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{11-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{17-23}}, title = {{NTG's Fileserver {\TeX}-NL}}, keywords = {{fileserver}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{45}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}} @ARTICLE{11-8, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{24}}, title = {{{\TeX}-NL archief}}, keywords = {{TEX-NL}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{23}}, author = {{Jules van Weerden}}, names = {{Jules van Weerden}}, abstract = {{Deze bijdrage beschrijft de sinds kort aanwezige beschikbaarheid van het {\TeX}-NL archief op het internet. Zowel inzage is mogelijk in een subject-lijst als in de {\TeX}-NL e-mails zelf.}}} @ARTICLE{11-9, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{25-27}}, title = {{INFO-{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{39}}, author = {{George Greenwade}}, names = {{George Greenwade}}, abstract = {{This article is a adaption of the message send to new users on the INFO-{\TeX} distribution list. It describes some additional features of the LISTSERV (including some other mailing lists) and the additional FILESERV facillity.}}} @ARTICLE{11-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{28-35}}, title = {{FGBBS zes maanden later}}, keywords = {{FGBBS,bulletin board,LittleComm,Silver Express,offline reading,Fidonet,internet}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{82}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn, Henk de Haan}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn, Henk de Haan}}, abstract = {{Henk de Haan en Frans Goddijn geven een uitleg over de werkzaamheden aan FGBBS. Nadat een directory met boeken op disk was gewist, werd de {\LaTeX}-bibliotheek van FGBBS belangrijk uitgebreid. Er werd voor bezoekers een mogelijkheid geschapen om zowel in fidonet als Internet berichten te lezen en te schrijven. Ook een systeem voor offline reading werd aangelegd.}}} @ARTICLE{11-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{36-40}}, title = {{Spoorboekje voor het inloggen op FGBBS met LittleComm}}, keywords = {{FGBBS,LittleComm,datacommunicatie}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{52}}, author = {{John Timmerman}}, names = {{John Timmerman}}, abstract = {{Zoals uit het kopje al blijkt, ga ik er hier vanuit dat je nog niet veel ervaring hebt met datacommunicatie, en dat je hebt gekozen voor het gebruik van LittleComm. LittleCommspoort je vlug, veilig en voordelig door het fascinerende land van de datacommunicatie. door hem gebruikte setup.}}} @ARTICLE{11-12, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{41-42}}, title = {{Greetings from TUG}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{23}}, author = {{Christina Thiele}}, names = {{Christina Thiele}}, } @ARTICLE{11-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{43-51}}, title = {{NTG's Lustrum}}, keywords = {{4{\TeX},BBS,cooperation NLUUG,cooperation CyrTUG}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{122}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{NTG's youth in context is depicted, with a wink to the future.}}} @ARTICLE{11-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{52-56}}, title = {{Ik ben een leek en vrij van pijnlijk weten}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{58}}, author = {{Huib van Krimpen}}, names = {{Huib van Krimpen}}, } @ARTICLE{11-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{57-59}}, title = {{TUG '93}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX} companion,{\LaTeX}2.09,NTS,outline fonts,PDF,CTAN,TUG conference,Aston}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{47}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{This report contains the main issues as perceived by the author. The idea is to get the flavor and my view of the good items across, at the expense of completeness.}}} @ARTICLE{11-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{60-61}}, title = {{TUG Board of Directors}}, keywords = {{board-of-directors,conference planning,long-range planning,public relations,{\TeX}nical council,exchange of TUGboat and bulletins of LUGs}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{34}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The following are the loosely formulated issues as perceived by me. For more preciseness the reader is referred to the (approved) minutes.}}} @ARTICLE{11-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{62-66}}, title = {{CyrTUG '93 and some more}}, keywords = {{CyrTUG,conference,cyrillics,MIR publishers}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{149}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The first open CyrTUG meeting with a few participants from abroad. A rich touristic program next to the usual issues: courses, and special attention to the national {\TeX} problems.}}} @ARTICLE{11-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{67-87}}, title = {{What is {\TeX} and METAFONT all about?}}, keywords = {{AMS{\TeX},electronic publishing,{\LaTeX},METAFONT,EPS,SGML,hyper{\TeX}}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{273}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A survey of {\TeX}, its flavours, and its twin sister METAFONT, within the context of Electronic Publishing, is given.}}} @ARTICLE{11-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{88-102}}, title = {{Gebruik en Management van {\TeX} in een Unix omgeving}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{177}}, author = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, names = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, abstract = {{Een {\TeX} systeem op een Unix systeem omhelst tegenwoordig veel meer dan alleen het gelijknamige programma. Een goed ge{\"\i}ntegreerde werkomgeving is mogelijk voor het produceren van een veelzijdig scala aan documenten. We bespreken de structuur van het {\TeX} systeem, de gangbare hulpmiddelen en pakketten eromheen, zoals printer drivers, previewers, font beheer, grafische pakketten, bibliografiebeheer, index beheer, spelling controle e.d. Verder besteden we aandacht aan de beheers- en installatie aspecten ervan, zowel voor een stand-alone systeem als voor een client-server omgeving met eventueel heterogene systemen.}}} @ARTICLE{11-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{103-110}}, title = {{METAFONT for Beginners}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{89}}, author = {{Geoffrey Tobin}}, names = {{Geoffrey Tobin}}, abstract = {{This is not a tutorial on METAFONT. It is an attempt to describe how some of the pitfalls in running the program may, hopefully, be avoided.}}} @ARTICLE{11-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{111-114}}, title = {{{\TeX} zonder omhaal; voor Atari ST en andere PC's (II)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{64}}, author = {{Robert Best}}, names = {{Robert Best}}, abstract = {{Deze cursus is een vervolg op die in MAPS 93.1. Na een inleiding in het eerste hoofdstuk werden toen in de volgende hoofdstukken behandeld: Boxen, METAFONT en PostScript, Figuren en een vreemd alfabet, en tot slot INI{\TeX} en INIMF. In deze bijdrage vervolgen we met hoofdstuk 6: het maken van een mooie brief, niet via `boxen' in {\TeX} maar m.b.v. {\LaTeX}. In hoofdstuk 7 bekijken we de `artikel-stijl', waarschijnlijk de meest gebruikte vorm van {\TeX}. Dat leidt tot een vergelijking van {\TeX} en {\LaTeX}. En tot een alternatief: {\TeX}sis. Deze cursus is een herdruk van een serie artikelen in het blad ST uitgegeven door Stichting ST. Daar zijn de in de tekst genoemde schijfjes te verkrijgen.}}} @ARTICLE{11-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{115-125}}, title = {{Frequently Asked Questions (II)}}, keywords = {{FAQ,frequently asked questions,comp.text.tex}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{134}}, author = {{Bobby Bodenheimer}}, names = {{Bobby Bodenheimer}}, abstract = {{This article contains answers to some frequently asked questions on comp.text.tex. Please don't ask these questions again, as they've been answered many times before. Note that Guoying Chen (chen-guo@spunky.cs.nyu.edu) posts the monthly document Supplementary {\TeX} Information to this newsgroup containing other information and software relevant to {\TeX} users but beyond the scope of this article.}}} @ARTICLE{11-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{126-127}}, title = {{Frequently Asked Questions about em{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{FAQ,frequently asked questions}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{28}}, author = {{Eberhard Mattes}}, names = {{Eberhard Mattes}}, abstract = {{This is an edited version of a document called em{\TeX}-user Frequently Asked Questions. Eberhard Mattes sent this document on october 3rd, 1993 to the em{\TeX}-user list. In the community of dutch {\TeX}-users em{\TeX} is widely spread. So questions to the list are probably also valuable for many em{\TeX}-users without direct access to the list.}}} @ARTICLE{11-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{128-130}}, title = {{Frequently Asked Questions about 4{\TeX} (1)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{44}}, author = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, abstract = {{In this note I have gathered some frequently asked questions and remarks. Most of the questions and answers were proposed in Dutch, so I tried to translate them into English. Blame me for (m)any bad English.}}} @ARTICLE{11-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{131-132}}, title = {{Gezeefd uit de {\TeX}-NL discussielijst (1993/2)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{26}}, author = {{Philippe Vanoverbeke}}, names = {{Philippe Vanoverbeke}}, abstract = {{Hier volgt opnieuw een selektie uit de NTG {\TeX}-NL discussielijst. Er werden enkele (korte) items uitgelicht uit de onderwerpen die aan bod gekomen zijn tussen juni en september 1993.}}} @ARTICLE{11-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{133-140}}, title = {{The Comprehensive {\TeX} Archive Network (CTAN)}}, keywords = {{CTAN,archives,FTP}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{86}}, author = {{George Greenwade}}, names = {{George Greenwade}}, abstract = {{This paper outlines the concept, development, and use of the Comprehensive {\TeX} Archive Network (CTAN) -- a network-accessible archive for files related to the {\TeX} family of document processing. The CTAN is a coordinated effort among consenting well-known archive sites which provides quick identification and retrieval files in a consistent manner from hosts on different continents, thereby reducing overall network load and increasing speed of retrieval. Moreover, it provides users with a parallel archive structure between hosts with holdings which are generally synchronized to within 30 hours of one another. This is achieved by routinely mirroring one another's holdings, as well as mirroring other archives to maintain an up-to-date collection of files.}}} @ARTICLE{11-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{141-154}}, title = {{4all{\TeX}: NTG's {\TeX} voor MS-DOS}}, keywords = {{em{\TeX},4{\TeX},distribution}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{106}}, author = {{Phons Bloemen}}, names = {{Phons Bloemen}}, abstract = {{Presentatie van het 4all{\TeX} floppypakket. Opgezet als een {\TeX}-installatie samengepakt op 1 HD floppy, uitbreidbaar met `hapklare' brokken in de vorm van extra floppies. Het geheel is gebaseerd op het em{\TeX} pakket van Eberhard Mattes, en het 4{\TeX}-pakket.}}} @ARTICLE{11-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{155-159}}, title = {{Shells for {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{4{\TeX},{\TeX}Shell,user interface}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{67}}, author = {{Phons Bloemen}}, names = {{Phons Bloemen}}, abstract = {{This is a review of two `shell' programs for em{\TeX}, the PC-{\TeX} implementation of Eberhard Mattes. The `shells' provide an integrated development environment for making {\TeX} documents. The two `shells' presented here are {\TeX}SHELL by J\"urgen Schlegelmilch, and 4{\TeX} by Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach and Maarten van der Vlerk.}}} @ARTICLE{11-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{160-162}}, title = {{Some notes about {\TeX} and MS-Windows}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{47}}, author = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, abstract = {{Many people know about {\TeX} compilers and {\TeX} utilities for the MS-DOS PC. However, in the world of WINDOWS there is a lack of knowledge. This note is intended to inform people who like to run {\TeX} under WINDOWS and want all the good stuff that WINDOWS and {\TeX} offers.}}} @ARTICLE{11-30, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{163-166}}, title = {{A Future for {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{48}}, author = {{Roger Hunter}}, names = {{Roger Hunter}}, abstract = {{The future of {\TeX} is invisibility. The role of {\TeX} should be similar to that of the microprocessor in a PC. The microprocessor is the heart of the system, but is completely invisible except for the sticker which says `intel inside.' {\TeX} must be made invisible with appropriate front-ends. These front-ends should emphasize the manipulation of content over appearance and reverse the trend toward WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) interfaces with their emphasis on manipulation of appearance. Content-oriented interfaces provide far greater user productivity than WYSIWYG systems, and {\TeX} is the ideal basis for such systems.}}} @ARTICLE{11-31, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{167-170}}, title = {{Scientific Word,... een eerste indruk}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{50}}, author = {{Philippe Vanoverbeke}}, names = {{Philippe Vanoverbeke}}, abstract = {{Eind 1992 kreeg ik een beta-versie van Scientific Word in de bus. Dhr. Kruger was toen zo vriendelijk om mij dit pakket toe te sturen ter evaluatie. Hierna volgt het rapport(je) met mijn bevindingen dat ik hem destijds toestuurde. Zonder twijfel is het product inmiddels verder ge\"evalueerd en zijn mijn bevindingen dan ook hoogswaarschijnlijk niet echt meer `up to date'.}}} @ARTICLE{11-32, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{171-176}}, title = {{The ease of including graphics in {\TeX} documents using 4{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{151}}, author = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, abstract = {{In this paper we will show how 4{\TeX} can be used to incorporate graphics in {\TeX} documents. Using 4{\TeX} it not only becomes easy to include graphics in {\TeX} files, but also makes it possible to preview and print {\TeX} documents (including graphics) on any machine and any printer. For inserting graphics in {\TeX} documents, 4{\TeX} uses the style file figures.sty, the shareware programs {\TeX}CAD and GRAPHIC WORKSHOP, and the freeware programs: HP2XX, BM2FONT,PCLTOMSP, and GhostScript. All these programs are discussed and we also discuss how 4{\TeX} uses the strength of these programs to incorporate graphics in {\TeX} documents.}}} @ARTICLE{11-33, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{177-184}}, title = {{Customizing {\LaTeX} lists}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{77}}, author = {{Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, Alexander Samarin}}, names = {{Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, Alexander Samarin}}, abstract = {{In this article, which is part of the third chapter of our forthcoming book `A {\LaTeX} Companion', we take a look at {\LaTeX}'s list environments. First the various parameters and commands controlling the standard {\LaTeX} lists, enumerate, itemize,anddescription, are discussed. Then the general list environment is introduced and we tell you how to build custom layouts by varying the values of the parameters controlling this environment.}}} @ARTICLE{11-34, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{185-186}}, title = {{An update on the babel system}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{30}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, abstract = {{This article describes the changes that have been made to the babel system, since the article describing the system appeared in TUGboat Volume 12, number 2. This article announces the release of a new version of the babel system.}}} @ARTICLE{11-35, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{187-190}}, title = {{Herziene afbreekpatronen voor het Nederlands}}, keywords = {{hyphenation,new dutch}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{46}}, author = {{Piet Tutelaers}}, names = {{Piet Tutelaers}}, abstract = {{Dutch hyphenation patterns for {\TeX} based upon `Groene boekje 1990'}}} @ARTICLE{11-36, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{191-193}}, title = {{Typesetting paragraphs of a specified shape}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{43}}, author = {{Donald Arseneau}}, names = {{Donald Arseneau}}, abstract = {{Editor's note: This description of an unusual macro file, shapepar.sty, is taken from the documentation; the full style file can be found in CTAN archives.}}} @ARTICLE{11-37, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{194-198}}, title = {{{\TeX} from \texttt{\indent} to \texttt{\par}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{70}}, author = {{Marek Ry\'cko, Bogus{\l}aw Jackowski}}, names = {{Marek Ry\'cko, Bogus{\l}aw Jackowski}}, } @ARTICLE{11-38, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{199-200}}, title = {{{\LaTeX} at WKAP in Dordrecht}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{27}}, author = {{Rob de Jeu}}, names = {{Rob de Jeu}}, abstract = {{In this article, I will explain a couple of things about the use of {\LaTeX} at Wolters Kluwer Academic Publishers (WKAP), a scientific publisher in Dordrecht. WKAP came into existence in the '80s after the merger between D. Reidel Publishing Company, Martinus Nijhoff and Dr W. Junk. Each year, WKAP publishes approximately 200 scientific journals and about 500 books (in reality, 200 scientific journal titles translates into some 1200 journal issues).}}} @ARTICLE{11-39, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{201-204}}, title = {{{\TeX} en braille... een illusie?}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{43}}, author = {{Philippe Vanoverbeke}}, names = {{Philippe Vanoverbeke}}, abstract = {{Ongetwijfeld zal bovenstaande titel menig NTG-lid de wenkbrauwen doen fronsen...: Typografie, laat staan {\TeX}, is nu wel het laatste wat wij in verband brengen met onze blinde medemens. In de volgende paragrafen zal ik pogen te verklaren waarom ik {\TeX} als een mogelijk hulpmiddel zie voor de produktie van (eenvoudige) documenten in braille.}}} @ARTICLE{11-40, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{205-210}}, title = {{BLUe's bibliography -- a generic approach}}, keywords = {{literature database,bibliography,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{76}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A new and flexible approach to maintaining and using a bibliography database within (All){\TeX} is provided.}}} @ARTICLE{11-41, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{211-212}}, title = {{Matrix icons via {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{matrix icons,{\LaTeX},picture environment}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{30}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Some macros for typesetting matrix icons are provided, based upon {\LaTeX}'s picture environment, which don't need coordinate awareness: just the (dimensionless) sizes of the `boxes.'}}} @ARTICLE{11-42, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{213-215}}, title = {{An application of literate programming: creating a format for the bulletin of the Polish TUG}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{37}}, author = {{W{\l}odek Bzyl, Tomasz Przechlewski}}, names = {{W{\l}odek Bzyl, Tomasz Przechlewski}}, } @ARTICLE{11-43, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{216-218}}, title = {{Teaching Typography -- The Didot Project}}, keywords = {{digital typography,curriculum development,letterforms,project report}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{37}}, author = {{Mary Dyson}}, names = {{Mary Dyson}}, abstract = {{This paper briefly outlines the Didot project on teaching digital typography. A key issue, namely the nature of the interaction between computer and design specialists, is discussed and related to the type of material that could be included in a curriculum for digital typography. Teaching methods and material that have been developed in this area are outlined and an evaluation of one of these methods is described.}}} @ARTICLE{11-44, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{219-220}}, title = {{Announcement {\LaTeX}2e -- A New Version of {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{35}}, author = {{Chris Rowley, Frank Mittelbach}}, names = {{Chris Rowley, Frank Mittelbach}}, abstract = {{{\LaTeX}2e is a new, standard version of {\LaTeX}-prepared and supported by the {\LaTeX}3 Project Team.}}} @ARTICLE{11-45, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{221-222}}, title = {{Review of recent {\LaTeX} books}}, keywords = {{book review}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{29}}, author = {{Nico Poppelier}}, names = {{Nico Poppelier}}, abstract = {{Reviews of `A Guide to {\LaTeX}, Document Preparation for Beginners and Advanced Users' (Helmut Kopka and Patrick Daly), `{\LaTeX} Line By Line, Tips and Techniques for Document Processing' (Antoni Diller).}}} @ARTICLE{11-46, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{223}}, title = {{The Technical Council and Special Interest Working Groups}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Michael Ferguson}}, names = {{Michael Ferguson}}, } @ARTICLE{11-47, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{224-225}}, title = {{Call for papers: TEP'94 \& TUG'94}}, keywords = {{call for papers,TEP,TUG conference,Darmstadt,Santa Barbara}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{28}}, author = {{Mary Dyson}}, names = {{Mary Dyson}}, abstract = {{call for papers for TEP'94 and for TUG'94.}}} @ARTICLE{11-48, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{226-227}}, title = {{Table of Contents TUGboat}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1993}}, volume = {{11}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{36}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Table of contents of TUGboat Volume 14.1, 14.2 and 14.3.}}} @BOOK{maps12, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-177}}, title = {{MAPS 94.1}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{2821}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{12-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-5}}, title = {{Verslag (1994/1)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{70}}, author = {{Jos Winnink}}, names = {{Jos Winnink}}, abstract = {{Opening 12e NTG bijeenkomst 18 november 1993; Verslag NTG bijeenkomst van 10 juni 1993; Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen; Begroting 1994; Wat verder ter tafel komt; {\LaTeX}3; MAPS; Verslag bijeenkomsten; Verslag werkgroepen; Rondvraag; Voordrachten: `(La){\TeX} gebruikersomgeving'; Volgende bijeenkomsten; Sluiting}}} @ARTICLE{12-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{6-7}}, title = {{Het weten waard}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{37}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{12-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{8-10}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1994/1)}}, keywords = {{chairman}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{53}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, } @ARTICLE{12-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{11-12}}, title = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1994/1)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{38}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{12-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-14}}, title = {{Jaarverslag NTG 1993}}, keywords = {{report NTG}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{36}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{12-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{15-16}}, title = {{Financieel verslag NTG 1993}}, keywords = {{financial report}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{32}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, } @ARTICLE{12-7, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{17-18}}, title = {{Use of {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} within the NTG community}}, keywords = {{{\TeX},{\LaTeX},{\LaTeX}3}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{25}}, author = {{Jos Winnink}}, names = {{Jos Winnink}}, abstract = {{At the 1993 spring meeting of the Dutch {\TeX} User Group (NTG) the NTG Board was asked to find out in what way {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} is used by its members. Main motivation for this question was to find out how important funding of the {\LaTeX}-3 project for the members of NTG is. Therefore it was necessary to have insight in the use of {\TeX} and related products/macro packages. It was decided that the board should held a inquiry among the members and if possible present the results at the fall 1993 meeting. This article describes the results of the survey.}}} @ARTICLE{12-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{19-21}}, title = {{The making of the 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM}}, keywords = {{CDROM,4all{\TeX},4{\TeX},ISO9660}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{67}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{In about one half year the world's first turn-key {\TeX} system on CD-ROM was produced. It contains the ms-dos {\TeX} workbench 4{\TeX} version 3.20 in perhaps the largest form ever, plus many {\TeX} sources that are valuable to any {\TeX} user. In this article we present a look behind the scenes, so you get some insight in the course of events that mark the production of NTG's first CD-ROM.}}} @ARTICLE{12-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{22-24}}, title = {{FGBBS: de jonge jarige}}, keywords = {{FGBBS,bulletin board,Fidonet,internet,4all{\TeX},LittleComm,CDROM}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{31}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn, Henk de Haan}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn, Henk de Haan}}, abstract = {{Stonden de eerste zes maanden van het FGBBS in het teken van onafgebroken uitbreiding van file- en berichtengebieden en het telkens vergroten van de beoogde gebruikersvriendelijkheid, het afgelopen halfjaar hebben we met succes gestreefd naar stabilisatie van het systeem, overigens zonder de actualiteit uit het oog te verliezen.}}} @ARTICLE{12-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{25-26}}, title = {{4{\TeX} 3.20 a technical note}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{25}}, author = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, abstract = {{With the release of the CD-ROM there will also be a new release of the 4{\TeX} workbench (version 3.20). In this note I will try and explain what will be different from the earlier versions (e.g. installed with 4all{\TeX}).}}} @ARTICLE{12-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{27-30}}, title = {{Frequently Asked Questions about 4{\TeX} (2)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{47}}, author = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, } @ARTICLE{12-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{31-33}}, title = {{{\TeX} zonder omhaal; voor Atari ST en andere PC's (III)}}, keywords = {{{\TeX}Draw,MIDI{\TeX},Music{\TeX},Big{\TeX},MakeIndex}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{100}}, author = {{Robert Best}}, names = {{Robert Best}}, abstract = {{{\TeX}Draw wordt getest. Veel Atari ST's worden gebruikt om electronisch muziek te maken, op te nemen (MIDI) en af te drukken in muziekschrift. Dat afdrukken kan ook met {\TeX}. Uitbreidingen van {\TeX} zoals {\LaTeX}, {\TeX}sis en Music{\TeX} maken het zetwerk makkelijker en mooier, maar {\TeX} heeft ook meer werkruimte nodig. We maken een Big{\TeX} en een trefwoordenregister voor een lange tekst. Deze cursus is een herdruk van een serie artikelen uit het blad ST, uitgegeven door Stichting ST. Daar zijn de in de tekst genoemde schijfjes te verkrijgen.}}} @ARTICLE{12-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{34-36}}, title = {{{\TeX} zonder omhaal; voor Atari ST en andere PC's (IV)}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX}2e}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{37}}, author = {{Mark van Veen}}, names = {{Mark van Veen}}, abstract = {{Deze keer gaat het over een recent uitgekomen macro-pakket, dat {\LaTeX}2e heet. Dit pakket vormt een krachtige set macro's, waarmee je zonder al te veel van {\TeX} af te weten goed uitziende teksten kan produceren. Deze cursus is een herdruk van een serie artikelen uit het blad ST, uitgegeven door Stichting ST. Daar zijn de in de tekst genoemde schijfjes te verkrijgen.}}} @ARTICLE{12-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{37-46}}, title = {{{\LaTeX}2e, an overview}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{145}}, author = {{Michel Goossens}}, names = {{Michel Goossens}}, abstract = {{This article gives an overview of the new or extended user commands available with {\LaTeX}2e, the new {\LaTeX} release, compared to the previous version {\LaTeX} 2.09. After introducing the newpreamble commands, the extensions for defining new commands and environments, and handling length and boxes are discussed. The new font selection commands are explained, both for text and math, and it is shown how to easily use different font families. A list of supported class and package files is given and new possibilities for controlling page contents and floats are discussed. Most of this material is described in much greater detail in `The {\LaTeX} Companion' and in the second edition of the {\LaTeX} Reference Manual.}}} @ARTICLE{12-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{47-49}}, title = {{Standard Document Classes and Packages}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{47}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, abstract = {{This article describes the Document Classes and Packages that are availabel or will be available shortly for use with {\LaTeX}2e . The number of available Packages and Classes will obviously change once {\LaTeX}2e is the `official' {\LaTeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{12-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{50-52}}, title = {{Upgrading old styles}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{51}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, abstract = {{This article deals with the things you have to look for when upgrading and old .sty file for {\LaTeX}2e , turning it into either a Document Class or a Package.}}} @ARTICLE{12-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{53-57}}, title = {{A brief guide to {\TeX} assistants}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{359}}, author = {{Sebastian Rahtz}}, names = {{Sebastian Rahtz}}, abstract = {{This paper offers a `back to basics' overview of the various types of software which are of assistance to the {\TeX}nical writer on a personal computer (this includes Unix machines, but excludes, for instance, VMS or VM/CMS systems). It is based on a presentation to the October UK-TUG meeting, and I am grateful to the other speakers, and our chairman Allan Reese, for insights and news. I would also like to refer readers to the Dutch {\TeX} Group's journal MAPS, whose issue 93.2 contains a variety of useful papers on {\TeX} interfaces, two of which are reproduced in Baskerville Volume 3.2 (December 1993).}}} @ARTICLE{12-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{58-59}}, title = {{Building virtual fonts with `fontinst'}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{32}}, author = {{Alan Jeffrey}}, names = {{Alan Jeffrey}}, abstract = {{This document gives a brief overview of the fontinst package. The fontinst package is used to build virtual fonts (VFs) which allow PostScript fonts to be used as drop-in replacements for the Computer Modern fonts in {\TeX}. Below, I'll describe VFs briefly, and describe how they can be built using the fontinst package.}}} @ARTICLE{12-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{60-62}}, title = {{{\TeX} to Hypertext Conversion with {\LaTeX}2HTML}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{82}}, author = {{Nikos Drakos}}, names = {{Nikos Drakos}}, abstract = {{{\LaTeX}2HTML is a conversion tool that allows existing documents written in {\LaTeX} to become part of a global multimedia system. This paper presents some of the reasons for using such a system and describes the basic conversion process.}}} @ARTICLE{12-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{63-68}}, title = {{Colour slides with {\LaTeX} and `seminar.sty'}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{200}}, author = {{Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz}}, names = {{Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz}}, } @ARTICLE{12-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{69-91}}, title = {{Making {\TeX} work}}, keywords = {{book,table of contents,abstract,preface,book review,review}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{550}}, author = {{Norman Walsh}}, names = {{Norman Walsh}}, abstract = {{This article contains the Table of Contents, Preface, and Chapter 4 of `Making {\TeX} Work' by Norman Walsh; published by O'Reilly and Associates (ISBN 1-56592-051-1). No effort has been made to preserve the `look and feel' of the book in this text, and some simplifications have been performed (particularly with respect to special formatting issues and package names).}}} @ARTICLE{12-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{92}}, title = {{Review of `Making {\TeX} work'}}, keywords = {{book review,review}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{15}}, author = {{Paul Thompson}}, names = {{Paul Thompson}}, abstract = {{This is a review of the book `Making {\TeX} Work' by Norman Walsch}}} @ARTICLE{12-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{93-96}}, title = {{Typesetting Greek texts by {\TeX} and {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{{\TeX},{\LaTeX},Greek,fonts,packages,freeware,commercial}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{49}}, author = {{Dimitrios Filippou}}, names = {{Dimitrios Filippou}}, abstract = {{This paper contains some information on whatever exists for typesetting by {\TeX} documents which contain entirely or in part Greek text. Those who would like to typeset Greek texts not by plain {\TeX}, but rather with {\LaTeX}, may find this short article quite useful as well.}}} @ARTICLE{12-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{97-99}}, title = {{Springer authors do it with {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{33}}, author = {{Angelika Binding}}, names = {{Angelika Binding}}, } @ARTICLE{12-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{100-102}}, title = {{{\TeX}-verwerking bij PRAGMA}}, keywords = {{use of {\TeX},practice}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{62}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{PRAGMA uses {\TeX} for producing educational texts. To facilitate development of educational materials, a dedicated macro package has been developed as well as a full featured {\TeX}(t) editing environment.}}} @ARTICLE{12-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{103-105}}, title = {{Computerondersteund tekstgebruik}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{44}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, } @ARTICLE{12-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{106-107}}, title = {{Data publishing}}, keywords = {{databases,spreadsheet,tables}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{28}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{This paper demonstrates how commercial software and {\LaTeX} can work together in data publishing.}}} @ARTICLE{12-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{108-110}}, title = {{Table design}}, keywords = {{tables design,rules,whitespace,fonts,alignment,justification}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{52}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{A critical look at table typesetting as practiced by {\LaTeX} users, with before-and-after examples.}}} @ARTICLE{12-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{111-114}}, title = {{BLUe's Transparencies}}, keywords = {{foils,formatting,generic style,slides,transparencies}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{59}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{{\TeX} macros for formatting transparencies are provided. The macros have been designed with reusability of earlier formatted document parts in mind, with a wink to maintenance of the tranparency set.}}} @ARTICLE{12-30, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{115}}, title = {{BLUe's Bibliography}}, keywords = {{literature database,bibliography,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{22}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{In addition to the earlier method of maintaining a database in {\TeX}, it is shown how to load the entries selectively, without modifying the entries of the database.}}} @ARTICLE{12-31, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{116-118}}, title = {{BLUe's Verbatim}}, keywords = {{escape character,formatting,generic style,semi-transparent,verbatim}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{40}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A suite of macros for verbatim mode is provided, which are simple, concise and flexible. The functionalities are: verbatim text, and file verbatim inclusion, with `options' for numbering and enabling of metacode. Options can be supplied via the toks variable \texttt{\thisverbatim}, and globally via \texttt{\everyverbatim}. The place within context can be handled via the defs \texttt{\preverbatim} and \texttt{\postverbatim}. The macros are context independent and can be used at the inner level with Any{\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{12-32, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{119-150}}, title = {{TUGboat BLUes}}, keywords = {{block comment,computer-assisted typography,Euro{\TeX},{\LaTeX},markup,optional parameters,preprints,publisher formats,TTN,TUGboat,multi-columns,verbatim}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{361}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The significance of TUGboat for the {\TeX} community at large is praised. (l)tugboat.sty, tugboat.cmn and the TUG authors' guide are discussed, next to their siblings (l)tugproc.sty and the option euro{\TeX}.sty. Article templates for the various `styles as is' are provided. Independent and in addition to these I included customing files. Also included is my concrete proposal for a tug.ppt style-for preprints of tugboat.sty, and tugproc.sty, in the spirit of ams.ppt. Furthermore, a new and simple alternative to the handling of options for {\TeX} is proposed, based on the toks variable \texttt{\this}, analogous to \texttt{\every}. This is applied to handling verbatims, with as a result a compact suite of verbatim macros to be used with Any{\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{12-33, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{151-152}}, title = {{Book review: `Practical SGML' \& `Math into {\TeX}'}}, keywords = {{book review,SGML}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{27}}, author = {{Nico Poppelier}}, names = {{Nico Poppelier}}, abstract = {{Two new books are discussed: `Practical SGML' from Eric Herwijnen, and `math into {\TeX}, a simple introduction to AMS-{\LaTeX}' from George Gr\"atzer.}}} @ARTICLE{12-34, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{153-154}}, title = {{The {\TeX} Hierarchy}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{31}}, author = {{Donald Arseneau, Raymond Chen, Victor Eijkhout}}, names = {{Donald Arseneau, Raymond Chen, Victor Eijkhout}}, abstract = {{For the UNIX operating system, a list of characterizations exists describing what constitutes a novice, a user, a guru, ... Here we give a similar list for users of {\TeX}. The reader is kindly asked to take this purely in a humorous vein.}}} @ARTICLE{12-35, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{155-156}}, title = {{Obtaining {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{CTAN,FTP,archives}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{24}}, author = {{Sebastian Rahtz}}, names = {{Sebastian Rahtz}}, abstract = {{The UK{\TeX} Archive (Internet `Daughter' archive) on ftp.{\TeX}.ac.uk is part of a collaborating network of archives organised by the {\TeX} Users Group known as CTAN (Comprehensive {\TeX} Archive Network). The three main archives now follow the same structure and have identical files (ftp.{\TeX}.ac.uk, ftp.shsu.edu and ftp.uni-stuttgart.de).}}} @ARTICLE{12-36, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{157-158}}, title = {{{\LaTeX}2e -- Second Test Release}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{28}}, author = {{Leslie Lamport, {\LaTeX}3 project team}}, names = {{Leslie Lamport, {\LaTeX}3 project team}}, abstract = {{The second test release of {\LaTeX} is now available. Notes about this release are at the end of this announcement. The first release revealed a few serious bugs and several other areas which need attention. Many people reported that documents and style files had been processed by the new system without serious problems; this includes one very important test -- the original text of `The {\LaTeX} Manual'! We can also report that this release has been tested with all the files in the {\LaTeX} 2.09 test suite and produces only predictable differences in the output.}}} @ARTICLE{12-37, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{159-164}}, title = {{Literate Programming Frequently Asked Questions}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{61}}, author = {{David Thomas}}, names = {{David Thomas}}, abstract = {{This document is for new and experienced users of literate programming tools. The purpose is to explain the concept of literate programming and to provide a resource for locating files of interest to literate programmers and those interested in literate programming.}}} @ARTICLE{12-38, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{165-166}}, title = {{Report Bacho{\TeX}'94}}, keywords = {{Bacho{\TeX},trip report,music,book design,BLUe introduction}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{33}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Education was about: \begin{itemize} \item survey of {\TeX},\item \item Polish typographical tradition,\item \item {\LaTeX}2e,\item \item LaMeX2e,\item \item Indexing and bibliography making,\item \item dvips use and so on,\item \item fonts with {\TeX} and PostScript,\item \item METAFONT.\item \end{itemize} The contributions to the conference were about: \begin{itemize} \item emerging GUST archive,\item \item {\LaTeX} and Polish,\item \item AmS{\LaTeX}.\item \end{itemize} Phil Taylor had the stage when talking in full colour about book design. Kees van der Laan talked about Manmac, and his BLUe system.}}} @ARTICLE{12-39, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{167}}, title = {{Report N{\TeX}'94}}, keywords = {{Nordic TUG,NTUG annual meeting}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{26}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The meeting of the Nordic countries was attended. Few people did show up because of the distance. Issues at stake were: \begin{itemize} \item hyphenation patterns for Norwegian,\item \item how to create your own documentsstyle,\item \item TUGboat blues.\item \end{itemize}}}} @ARTICLE{12-40, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{168-169}}, title = {{Announcement TUG '94}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,Santa Barbara}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{29}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Announcement of TUG '94 conference.}}} @ARTICLE{12-41, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{170}}, title = {{Announcement Euro{\TeX}'94}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},conference,announcement,Gdansk}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{16}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Announcement of Euro{\TeX}'94 conference.}}} @ARTICLE{12-42, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{171-174}}, title = {{Announcement 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM}}, keywords = {{announcement,4{\TeX},4all{\TeX},CDROM}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{37}}, author = {{Erik Frambach, Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Erik Frambach, Wietse Dol}}, abstract = {{Announcement of NTG's 4all{\TeX} cd-rom}}} @ARTICLE{12-43, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{175}}, title = {{Cursusaankondiging 4{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{courses,4{\TeX}}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{16}}, author = {{Erik Frambach, Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Erik Frambach, Wietse Dol}}, abstract = {{Aankondiging 4{\TeX} cursus}}} @ARTICLE{12-44, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{176-177}}, title = {{Table of Contents TUGboat}}, keywords = {{TUGboat,contents}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{12}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{28}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Table of contents of TUGboat Volume 14.4, and 15.1.}}} @BOOK{100faq, type = {{book}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{1-27}}, title = {{100 Frequently Asked Questions}}, keywords = {{FAQ,frequently asked questions,Baskerville}}, year = {{1994}}, series = {{MAPS Special Editions}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{312}}, editor = {{Robin Fairbairns}}, names = {{Robin Fairbairns}}, abstract = {{100 frequently asked questions answered. Topics are {\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, METAFONT, PostScript, special typesetting, format conversions, DVI drivers \& previewers, recent {\TeX} developments and more.}}} @BOOK{maps13, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-214}}, title = {{MAPS 94.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{3930}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{13-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-4}}, title = {{Verslag (1994/2)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{63}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Opening 13e NTG bijeenkomst 9 juni 1994; Verslag NTG bijeenkomst van 18 november 1993; Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen; NTG ledenvergadering; Verslag werkgroepen; Rondvraag en Sluiting; Voordrachten: `{\TeX} en Educatie'; Volgende bijeenkomsten; Sluiting}}} @ARTICLE{13-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{5-6}}, title = {{Het weten waard}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{38}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{13-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1994/2)}}, keywords = {{chairman}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, } @ARTICLE{13-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{8-9}}, title = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1994/2)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{68}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{13-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{10-11}}, title = {{NTG's Listserver {\TeX}-NL}}, keywords = {{listserver,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{24}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{13-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{12-13}}, title = {{NTG's Listserver 4{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{listserver,4{\TeX}}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{20}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{13-7, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{14-17}}, title = {{Verslag TUG '94}}, keywords = {{conference,TUG conference,Santa Barbara}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{69}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, } @ARTICLE{13-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{18-22}}, title = {{Goossens at TUG '94}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,Santa Barbara}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{72}}, author = {{Michel Goossens}}, names = {{Michel Goossens}}, } @ARTICLE{13-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{23-26}}, title = {{Report CyrTUG '94}}, keywords = {{CyrTUG,Dubna,PostScript,{\LaTeX}2e}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{338}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A magnificant trip to get to know the CyrTUG and its chapters better. Not only Moscow, but also Kazan and St-Petersburg. The driving force is hosted at MIR. The cooperation of the JINR at Dubna and CyrTUG is bound te become beneficial. As usual there were courses around the conference. Issues discussed during the conference: \begin{itemize} \item {\LaTeX} developments,\item \item Use of colours,\item \item {\LaTeX} and PostScript,\item \item UNIX platforms next to DOS,\item \item Various user reports,\item \item BLUe's set of macros on top of manmac.\item \end{itemize}}}} @ARTICLE{13-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{27-30}}, title = {{Goossens at Euro{\TeX}'94 in Gdansk}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},conference,Gdansk}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{59}}, author = {{Michel Goossens}}, names = {{Michel Goossens}}, abstract = {{Report of Euro{\TeX}'94 conference in Gdansk.}}} @ARTICLE{13-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{31-33}}, title = {{FGBBS: de kastelein}}, keywords = {{FGBBS,bulletin board,Fidonet,FrontDoor,internet,4all{\TeX},CDROM}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{30}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn, Henk de Haan}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn, Henk de Haan}}, abstract = {{De komst van de 4all{\TeX} CD-ROMs heeft de afgelopen maanden voor veel nieuws gezorgd, ook op FGBBS. Het NTG schonk FGBBS een CD-ROM drive, waarop de 4all{\TeX} werd geplaatst. Inmiddels is de tweede editie 4all{\TeX} gearriveerd, en deze is in zijn geheel beschikbaar via het bulletin board systeem.}}} @ARTICLE{13-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{34-36}}, title = {{General information 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM}}, keywords = {{4{\TeX},4all{\TeX},CDROM}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{43}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{The most important items concerning the 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM.}}} @ARTICLE{13-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{37-38}}, title = {{4all{\TeX}, the ultimate {\TeX}-resource}}, keywords = {{4all{\TeX},review}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{28}}, author = {{Hans Paijmans}}, names = {{Hans Paijmans}}, abstract = {{In het Nederlandse maandblad `Personal Computer Magazine' verscheen in het oktober nummer de hier beschreven recensie van {\LaTeX}/{\TeX} en de onlangs verschenen 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM.}}} @ARTICLE{13-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{39}}, title = {{The NTG 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM on the Macintosh}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{28}}, author = {{Hans Renkema}}, names = {{Hans Renkema}}, } @ARTICLE{13-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{40-42}}, title = {{Makefont: a new 4{\TeX} utility}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{38}}, author = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, abstract = {{The second release of the 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM comes with 4{\TeX} 3.25. This version of 4{\TeX} has a new utility that is not described in the manual. In this note I will explain the use of this extra feature: Makefont. With the makefont utility it becomes easy to include whatever PostScript font you need into your (La){\TeX} documents. If you have a complete font family of PostScript fonts you can also decide to develop your own style file and use this as your default font family (instead of the CMR family).}}} @ARTICLE{13-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{43-44}}, title = {{{\TeX} zonder omhaal; voor Atari ST en andere PC's (V)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{34}}, author = {{Robert Best}}, names = {{Robert Best}}, abstract = {{{\TeX} kan niet alleen instructies uitvoeren maar ook vragen. Het resultaat hangt dan af van de antwoorden van de gebruiker: interactie. Als voorbeeld maken we een brief waarbij de gebruiker (die niets van {\TeX} hoeft te weten) nog de afzender en de geadresseerde kan aangeven. En ... {\TeX} doet niet moeilijk over Poolse accenten. Deze cursus is een herdruk van een serie artikelen uit het blad ST, uitgegeven door Stichting ST. Daar zijn de in de tekst genoemde schijfjes te verkrijgen.}}} @ARTICLE{13-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{45-50}}, title = {{{\TeX} zonder omhaal; voor Atari ST en andere PC's (VI)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{89}}, author = {{Rens Swart}}, names = {{Rens Swart}}, abstract = {{METAFONT is een programma waarmee het mogelijk is om via wiskundig beschreven curves en oppervlakken lettertypes of andere symbolen te ontwerpen. Deze kunnen gebruikt worden in het zetprogramma {\TeX}. Dit artikel gaat niet in op het werkelijke ontwerp-proces en zelfs nauwelijks op de faciliteiten die METAFONT hiertoe biedt, maar op de vraag hoe METAFONT functioneert in de Atari-omgeving, gebaseerd op het Public Domain pakket van Christoph Strunk. Kortom: hoe kun je aan het werk met METAFONT? Deze cursus is een herdruk van een serie artikelen uit het blad ST, uitgegeven door Stichting ST. Daar zijn de in de tekst genoemde schijfjes te verkrijgen.}}} @ARTICLE{13-18, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{51}}, title = {{N{\TeX} 1.2}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{19}}, author = {{Frank Langbein}}, names = {{Frank Langbein}}, } @ARTICLE{13-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{52-54}}, title = {{BLUe blood in math mode?}}, keywords = {{Palatino,Johan Polak,Donald Knuth,Hermann Zapf,math fonts,TYPO-L,typography}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{44}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Some time ago I started work on a book (a collection of letters written by one of the most renowned Dutch publishers, Johan Polak) and at the time I was typesetting it in the Palatino font. Then I heard that the creator of Palatino, the world famous Hermann Zapf, has worked with Donald Knuth. What did they do, I wondered? Is {\TeX} more famous than we think it is? Did the fingers of both geniuses touch in the creation of our Math fonts? The replies to my queries in TYPO-L were promising. You decide.}}} @ARTICLE{13-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{55-56}}, title = {{CijferBLUes: Verborgen schoonheid in {\LaTeX} 2.09}}, keywords = {{oldstyle,mediaeval,digits,numbers}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{42}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Een toevallige samenloop van omstandigheden brengt een even verbluffend mooie als oeroude optie van {\TeX} aan het licht, die tot dusverre door bijna iedereen over het hoofd is gezien. Prachtige `hangende cijfers' zijn in de standaard Computer Modern fonts al sinds jaar en dag beschikbaar, als math italic.}}} @ARTICLE{13-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{57}}, title = {{The new {\LaTeX}: {\LaTeX}2e}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{14}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{The {\LaTeX}3 project team is pleased to announce the release of the new standard version of {\LaTeX}. It is upwardly compatible with existing {\LaTeX} documents, and contains new features including the long-awaited graphics extensions.}}} @ARTICLE{13-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{58-64}}, title = {{Document Classes and Packages for {\LaTeX}2e}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{101}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, abstract = {{In the first section of this article I describe what document classes and packages are and how they relate to {\LaTeX} 2.09's style files. Then the process of upgrading existing style files for use with {\LaTeX}2e is described. Finally I give an overview of the standard packages and document classes that are part of the distribution of {\LaTeX}2e.}}} @ARTICLE{13-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{65-72}}, title = {{How to make your own document style in {\LaTeX}2e}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX}2e,document class design,document class implementation,lecture notes}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{164}}, author = {{Dag Langmyhr}}, names = {{Dag Langmyhr}}, abstract = {{The new {\LaTeX}2e makes it very easy to create new document classes. This paper describes how to use the new features of {\LaTeX}2e. The class `lecnotes' -- a document class suitable for lecture notes -- is used as an example.}}} @ARTICLE{13-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{73-110}}, title = {{A Guide to use Macros and Style Files in {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX}2.09,optional style files}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{798}}, author = {{Tetsuo Iwakumay, Tetsuo Furukawa}}, names = {{Tetsuo Iwakumay, Tetsuo Furukawa}}, abstract = {{People may not need to read this article any more if {\LaTeX}2e has been completed. But since this is somehow transient period from {\LaTeX} v.2.09 to a new one, this kind of documents may be useful for those who are making documents every day and night. This is a concise guide for these people. Authors are hoping this may become a help to many users of {\LaTeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{13-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{111-114}}, title = {{Een proefschrift zonder knippen en plakken}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{199}}, author = {{Henk de Haan}}, names = {{Henk de Haan}}, abstract = {{{\LaTeX} wordt voor veel verschillende soorten drukwerk gebruikt. In dit artikel wordt het vormgeven van een proefschrift met behulp van {\LaTeX}2e beschreven. Hierbij spelen de persoonlijke voorkeuren van de auteur een belangrijke rol, zonder dat daarbij de krachtige mogelijkheden van {\LaTeX} onbenut blijven.}}} @ARTICLE{13-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{115-117}}, title = {{{\TeX}: buitengewoon goed tekstverwerken}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{88}}, author = {{Hans Renkema}}, names = {{Hans Renkema}}, abstract = {{In bepaalde kringen is het tekstverwerkingsprogramma (of beter: het zetsysteem) {\TeX} bijzonder populair. Het programma is vrij verkrijgbaar bij Bulletin Boards en bestaat ook in een versie voor de Mac. Hans Renkema is een enthousiaste {\TeX} Macintosh gebruiker. In dit artikel geeft hij een beschrijving van {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{13-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{118-122}}, title = {{{\TeX} en SGML bij Elsevier Science}}, keywords = {{Elsevier,electronic publishing,{\LaTeX},SGML}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{66}}, author = {{Simon Pepping}}, names = {{Simon Pepping}}, abstract = {{Dit artikel beschrijft enkele aspekten van Elsevier Science's electronic publishing programma. Alle tijdschriften in de Physics en Mathematics uitgeefprogramma's accepteren {\LaTeX} files van auteurs en gebruiken die voor publikatie. De dvi files gebruiken PostScript fonts die gekombineerd zijn in in-huis ontwikkelde virtuele fonts. In andere wetenschappelijke disciplines worden auteurs files van een breed scala aan tekstverwerkings programmas geaccepteerd en gebruikt voor publikatie. In zijn toekomstige electronic publishing strategie kent Elsevier Science een centrale rol toe aan SGML. Alle binnenkomende artikelen zullen uniform gestruktureerd worden met gebruik van SGML. Alle benodigde publikatietypen zullen uit deze ene bron worden gegenereerd. {\TeX} is een uitstekende formatter voor sommige van deze publikatietypen.}}} @ARTICLE{13-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{123-126}}, title = {{Real life book production -- lessons learned from `The {\LaTeX} Companion'}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{48}}, author = {{Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach}}, names = {{Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach}}, abstract = {{Some aspects of the production of The {\LaTeX} Companion are described.}}} @ARTICLE{13-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{127-135}}, title = {{Headers and footers in {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{96}}, author = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, names = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, abstract = {{Standard {\LaTeX} offers the page styles empty, plain, headings and myheadings. For simple page layouts these suffice, but they are rather rigid. A more flexible page layout may be obtained by using the FANCYHEADINGS package. This article describes how to create advanced page headers and footers in {\LaTeX} documents by using this package. Some of the techniques described are also applicable with other page styles.}}} @ARTICLE{13-30, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{136-138}}, title = {{METAFONT als matrixprinter}}, keywords = {{METAFONT}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{114}}, author = {{Phons Bloemen}}, names = {{Phons Bloemen}}, abstract = {{Een verslagje van een stoeipartij met METAFONT, waarbij METAFONT wordt `misbruikt' als matrixprinter. Door alleen de vorm van de `printnaalden' te defini\"eren, en een beperkt aantal plaatsen waar ze neer mogen komen, kun je heel snel een font in elkaar zetten.}}} @ARTICLE{13-31, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{139-148}}, title = {{PostScript fonts in {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{PostScript fonts,automated font generation,font installation}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{131}}, author = {{Phons Bloemen}}, names = {{Phons Bloemen}}, abstract = {{A guide through the jungle of installing and using PostScript and other types of fonts in {\TeX}. The installation of the font is discussed, and it is shown how to use the fonts in an automatic font generation scheme.}}} @ARTICLE{13-32, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{149-152}}, title = {{(Al)Dra{\TeX}, a package for doing (portable) graphics in {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{graphics,{\TeX},{\LaTeX},Dra{\TeX}}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{148}}, author = {{Jos Winnink}}, names = {{Jos Winnink}}, abstract = {{Eitan Gurari's graphics package for (La){\TeX} is discucced.}}} @ARTICLE{13-33, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{153-166}}, title = {{Plaatjes in een tekst}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{495}}, author = {{Jeroen Fokke, Piet van Oostrum}}, names = {{Jeroen Fokke, Piet van Oostrum}}, abstract = {{In deze artikel wordt eerst aandacht besteed aan de (beperkte) mogelijkheden die {\LaTeX} zelf biedt voor het maken van plaatjes. Soms zijn die voldoende, en dan is het wel zo gemakkelijk om die te gebruiken. Daarna wordt de rol van PostScript besproken bij het gebruik van plaatjes, al of niet in combinatie met {\LaTeX}. Vervolgens wordt een vijftal tekenprogramma's besproken waarmee interactief ingewikkeldere figuren gemaakt kunnen worden. Tenslotte wordt aangegeven hoe `bitmaps' (letterlijke afbeeldingen van het scherm van een computer) als plaatje behandeld kunnen worden. Dit laatste is vooral van belang bij het schrijven van handleidingen voor programma's.}}} @ARTICLE{13-34, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{167-177}}, title = {{PPCH{\TeX}: Chemische Structuurformules in {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{{Con\TeX t} chemics,PPCH{\TeX},chemical formulas,structure formulas}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{201}}, author = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}}, names = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}}, abstract = {{In dit artikel wordt een macropakket beschreven waarmee chemische (structuur)formules kunnen worden gezet. Dit pakket is te gebruiken bovenop Plain {\TeX}, {\LaTeX} en andere pakketten. Het pakket is in eerste instantie ontwikkeld bovenop {Con\TeX t}.\\ This article is about a package for typesetting chemical formulas. The package has a multi-lingual interface. This means that all all commands and keywords can be toggled to English. Some day, this article and the manual will be translated in English too.}}} @ARTICLE{13-35, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{178-182}}, title = {{Een meertalige interface naar {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{interface,user interface,multilingual interface,{Con\TeX t} interface}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{61}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{Macropakketten voor {\TeX} zijn vrijwel altijd Engelstalig. In dit artikel wordt een meertalige interface beschreven, zoals die is toegepast in PPCH{\TeX}, een pakket dat kan worden gebruikt om chemische structuurformules te zetten.}}} @ARTICLE{13-36, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{183}}, title = {{Sub- en Superscripts in Chemische Formules}}, keywords = {{superscript alignment,subscript alignment,PPCH{\TeX},font dimensions}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{31}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{In dit (korte) artikel wordt een mechanisme beschreven om subscript op een lijn te krijgen. Dit is nodig omdat de positie van een subscript mede bepaald wordt door de hoogte en diepte van een eventueel aanwezig superscript.}}} @ARTICLE{13-37, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{184-188}}, title = {{MIDI2{\TeX}, een Music{\TeX} tool}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{81}}, author = {{Hans Kuykens}}, names = {{Hans Kuykens}}, } @ARTICLE{13-38, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{189-199}}, title = {{BLUe's Format}}, keywords = {{active documents,design,documentation,error handling,floats,format,inner versus outer world,inserts,lifephases formats,markup language,plain {\TeX},scripts,software engineering,reusable software parts,style,transparencies}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{137}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{An independent format -- blue.fmt -- is proposed to assist authors with creating, formatting, exchanging and maintaining compuscripts during the lifephases of publications. The format builds upon manmac.{\TeX} and the functionalities provided by tugboat.sty. Experience gained by publishers has been picked up too, because of my in-depth study of the activities of AMS with respect to {\TeX} formatting. More recent work of Knuth and co-authors has been borrowed from gkpmac.{\TeX}. The design goal was to provide a format which suits me, which is easy to customize -- to the world outside, and in general to changing circumstances -- and which complies with the adages of software engineering. Another aim of blue.fmt is that it can be used throughout the lifecycle of publications on modest equipment to format articles, transparencies and you name it. The hoped for lifety is a lifetime. En-passant the design process is accounted for. New is the handling of a database of references -- with cross-referencing -- or pictures all in one-pass job.}}} @ARTICLE{13-39, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{200-206}}, title = {{BLUe's Graphs}}, keywords = {{circle,curve,databases,disks,graphics,format,lines,pictures,plain {\TeX},reusable software parts,selective loading,software engineering,splines,vectors}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{82}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Graphics facilities for plain {\TeX} have been collected from The {\TeX}book, manmac and gkpmac, as part of blue.fmt. The gkpmac picture macros are handy and provide a subset of {\LaTeX}'s functionality. A database of pictures is proposed. No interaction with METAFONT (or ) nor the incorporation of encapsulated PostScript have been treated.}}} @ARTICLE{13-40, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{207-209}}, title = {{BLUe's Cross-referencing}}, keywords = {{compatible extension,cross-referencing,graph referencing,math referencing,optional parameters,plain {\TeX},symbolic names,tables referencing}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{58}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A one-pass semi-automatic cross-referencing scheme for math is proposed, which requires some hand adjustments when forward references are used. The method is just a little beyond manmac's approach, to assist BLUe.}}} @ARTICLE{13-41, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{210-211}}, title = {{Paradigms: Plain's \texttt{\item}-s extended}}, keywords = {{BLUe format,items,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{24}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The design and coding of items for BLUe's format is explained. The treated items -- bulleted, (automatically) numbered or alphabetisized -- are a compatible extension to plain's \texttt{\item}. Pitfalls in use are mentioned.}}} @ARTICLE{13-42, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{212-214}}, title = {{Paradigms: Headache?}}, keywords = {{BLUe format,headings,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1994}}, volume = {{13}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{40}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The design of headings for BLUe's format is explained, starting from the basic and general two-part macros up to the full-blown blue((sub)sub)head versions.}}} @BOOK{maps14, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-217}}, title = {{MAPS 95.1}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{3540}}, editor = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{14-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-4}}, title = {{Verslag (1995/1)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{66}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Opening 14e NTG bijeenkomst 17 november 1994; Verslag NTG bijeenkomst van 9 juni 1994; Ingekomen stukken en mededelingen; Begroting 1995; Wat verder ter tafel komt; Communicatie; Rondvraag en Sluiting; Voordrachten; Volgende bijeenkomsten}}} @ARTICLE{14-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{5-6}}, title = {{Het weten waard}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{46}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{14-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1995/1)}}, keywords = {{chairman}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{14}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, } @ARTICLE{14-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{8-10}}, title = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1995)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{58}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{14-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{11-12}}, title = {{Concept begroting 1995}}, keywords = {{budget}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{33}}, author = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, } @ARTICLE{14-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-14}}, title = {{Financieel verslag NTG 1994}}, keywords = {{financial report}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{38}}, author = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, } @ARTICLE{14-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{15-17}}, title = {{Jaarverslag NTG 1994}}, keywords = {{report NTG}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{47}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{14-8, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{18}}, title = {{From the TUG President}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Christina Thiele}}, names = {{Christina Thiele}}, } @ARTICLE{14-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{19-20}}, title = {{Op FGBBS vaart alles wel}}, keywords = {{FGBBS,bulletin board,statistics,4all{\TeX},OS/2}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{20}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{FGBBS kreeg weer de nodige uitbreidingen, waarvan een sneller modem het meest merkbaar is.}}} @ARTICLE{14-10, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{21}}, title = {{{\TeX}-NL discussielijst}}, keywords = {{listserver,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{15}}, author = {{Jules van Weerden}}, names = {{Jules van Weerden}}, abstract = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}} @ARTICLE{14-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{22-23}}, title = {{De NTG op het World Wide Web}}, keywords = {{NTG,internet,WWW,WWW}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{70}}, author = {{Henk de Haan}}, names = {{Henk de Haan}}, abstract = {{Het internet is een van de meest snel groeiende elektronische media. Dit is mede te danken aan het zogenaamde World Wide Web (WWW). In dit artikel wordt ingegaan op de functie van het Word Wide Web, het gebruikte tekstformaat (HTML) en de mogelijkheden die het voor de NTG kan hebben. Er wordt ingegaan op de huidige (experimentele) service en er worden een aantal mogelijke nieuwe toepassingen vermeld.}}} @ARTICLE{14-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{24-26}}, title = {{General information 3rd edition of the 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{38}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{14-13, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{27-29}}, title = {{Some Announcements from Usenet}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{47}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{14-14, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{30}}, title = {{Announcement from the {\LaTeX}3 Project Team}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{12}}, author = {{Frank Mittelbach}}, names = {{Frank Mittelbach}}, abstract = {{We are pleased to present the final report on `Math Font Encoding' produced by Justin Ziegler for the {\LaTeX}3 project.}}} @ARTICLE{14-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{31-34}}, title = {{Diplomatic edition of a medieval Icelandic manuscript}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{278}}, author = {{Andrea de Leeuw van Weenen}}, names = {{Andrea de Leeuw van Weenen}}, } @ARTICLE{14-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{35-36}}, title = {{Het digitaal produceren van een proefschrift}}, keywords = {{thesis,DocuTech,4all{\TeX}}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{27}}, author = {{Ed Boets}}, names = {{Ed Boets}}, abstract = {{Het digitaal produceren van een proefschrift beschrijft hoe een proefschrift, in {\LaTeX} gemaakt, als PostScript-file via het modem naar de drukker gestuurd kan worden om vervolgens op een DocuTech systeem (600 dpi) gedrukt te worden.}}} @ARTICLE{14-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{37-39}}, title = {{METAFONT's mode\_def in action}}, keywords = {{METAFONT,mode\_def,bitmapped fonts}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{57}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{In order to obtain maximum output quality when using METAFONT for rendering bitmapped fonts you need to specify the characteristics of the intended output device. This is done by defining a mode\_def in which several variables are assigned. The meaning and effect of these variables are discussed in a case study of two types of laser printers.}}} @ARTICLE{14-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{40-46}}, title = {{Combining {\TeX} and PostScript}}, keywords = {{PostScript,inclusion of graphics,dictionaries,error handling}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{132}}, author = {{Vladimir Batagelj}}, names = {{Vladimir Batagelj}}, abstract = {{PostScript is becoming a de facto standard as a device independent page description language. By embedding PostScript elements in {\TeX} we can extend the use of {\TeX} to new areas of application. In the first part of the paper we give some general information about PostScript and its features. In the rest of the paper we present some of our own experiences and solutions in combining {\TeX} and PostScript: \begin{itemize} \item dictionaries, prolog files and how to save a lot of space with PostScript figures produced in CorelDRAW, Mathematica, ...;\item \item writing {\TeX}-PostScript macros, case: drawing graphs (combinatorics) in {\TeX}; PostScript error handling mechanism, an application in function graph drawing macro.\item \end{itemize}}}} @ARTICLE{14-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{47-48}}, title = {{Portable Documents: Why Use SGML?}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{24}}, author = {{David Barron}}, names = {{David Barron}}, abstract = {{In this article we present a few ideas as a framework for the discussion of portable documents. We address a number of questions: \begin{itemize} \item What are portable documents?\item \item Who needs them, and why?\item \item How to produce them, now and in the future.\item \end{itemize}}}} @ARTICLE{14-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{49-52}}, title = {{Formatting SGML Manuscripts}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{90}}, author = {{Jonathan Fine}}, names = {{Jonathan Fine}}, abstract = {{This article is about typography, SGML, {\TeX}, and SIMSIM, which is a new {\TeX} macro package. Close by are copies of several of the OHP transparencies. They were typeset directly from an SGML document instance using SIMSIM.}}} @ARTICLE{14-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{53-55}}, title = {{SGML and {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{38}}, author = {{Horst Szillat}}, names = {{Horst Szillat}}, abstract = {{SGML -- Standard Generalized Markup Language -- is a formal language to describe structured text documents. It should be introduced here by comparison to {\TeX} and {\LaTeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{14-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{56-60}}, title = {{HTML \& {\TeX}: Making them sweat}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{53}}, author = {{Peter Flynn}}, names = {{Peter Flynn}}, abstract = {{HTML is often criticised fo its presentation-oriented conception. But it does contain sufficient structural information for many everyday purposes and this has led to its development into a more stable form. Future platforms for the World Wide Web may support other applications of SGML, and the present climate of popularity of the Web is a suitable opportunity for consolidation of the more stable features. {\TeX} is pre-eminently stable and provides an ideal companion for the process of translating HTML into print.}}} @ARTICLE{14-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{61-63}}, title = {{The Inside Story of Life at Wiley with SGML, {\LaTeX} and Acrobat}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{41}}, author = {{Geeti Granger}}, names = {{Geeti Granger}}, } @ARTICLE{14-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{64-66}}, title = {{Theory into Practice: working with SGML, PDF and {\LaTeX} at Elsevier Science}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{30}}, author = {{Martin Key}}, names = {{Martin Key}}, } @ARTICLE{14-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{67-68}}, title = {{{\LaTeX}2HTML Update'95}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{33}}, author = {{Nikos Drakos}}, names = {{Nikos Drakos}}, abstract = {{A new version of {\LaTeX}2HTML (version 95.1) is available since January 1995. This article outlines some of the main changes.}}} @ARTICLE{14-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{69-73}}, title = {{{\LaTeX}2HTML ervaringen; Van Handleiding in {\LaTeX} tot Hulp Module op Internet}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{117}}, author = {{Arno Kemperman}}, names = {{Arno Kemperman}}, abstract = {{Welkom op de digitale snelweg! Steeds meer informatie wordt er aangeboden op het Internet, en met het uitgroeien van het Internet groeit de onoverzichtelijkheid. In dit artikel wordt een toepassing van {\LaTeX}2HTML beschreven waarbij een {\LaTeX} document wordt omgezet naar een reeks goed gestructueerde pagina's op het World-Wide Web. Deze toepassing betreft een document die een handleiding is voor Internet-gebruikers (voornamelijk voor medewerkers van Laboratoriumvoor Analytische Chemie, KUN, Nijmegen). Er worden wat voordelen en voorbeelden van het {\LaTeX}2HTML gebruik gegeven en hoe je het programma kunt aanpassen naar je eigen wensen. Bekijk de {\LaTeX} documenten ook eens op deze moderne manier en blader eens met de muis door je tekst, getransformeerd tot een digitaal wonder op je scherm. Oftewel: {\LaTeX}2HTML2!}}} @ARTICLE{14-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{74-76}}, title = {{Electronic Publication and Data Distribution for the Five College Astronomy Department}}, keywords = {{electronic publishing,thesis,WWW,preprints,data distribution}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{74}}, author = {{Karen Strom}}, names = {{Karen Strom}}, abstract = {{The Star Formation Group at FCAD has begun to make use of the World Wide Web to explore the advantages of hypermedia presentations for the distribution of preprints, Ph. D. theses and observatory publications. As a byproduct of this work, a method for displaying subscripts and superscripts has been developed. This set of bitmaps is publically available.}}} @ARTICLE{14-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{77-82}}, title = {{A World Wide Web Interface to CTAN}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{204}}, author = {{Norman Walsh}}, names = {{Norman Walsh}}, abstract = {{There are a lot of different software packages, style files, fonts, etc. in the CTAN archives. Finding the things you need in a timely fashion can be difficult, as I found out while writing Making {\TeX} Work. The ability to combine descriptions of packages with the directory listings from CTAN could help alleviate some of the difficulty. HTML, the document structuring language of the World Wide Web, provides one possible means of combining different views of the archive into a single vision. The CTAN-Web project is my attempt to provide this vision.}}} @ARTICLE{14-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{83-86}}, title = {{An Introduction to Hyper{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{hyper{\TeX},hyperlink,xhdvi,HTML,\special}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{57}}, author = {{Arthur Smith}}, names = {{Arthur Smith}}, abstract = {{The popularity of the World-Wide-Web and the HTML hypertext language for electronic distribution of information over the internet has thus far been difficult to extend to scientific documents, in part because {\TeX}, the word processing language of choice for technical and mathematical documents, does not have the hypertext capabilities necessary for full integration into the WWW. Hyper{\TeX} consists of a collection of extensions of {\TeX} to handle both internal and external (local or networked) hypertext, thus allowing the huge body of {\TeX}-based documents to be more fully integrated with the WWW. This introduction was originally prepared for the American Physical Society e-print meeting at Los Alamos, New Mexico, Oct. 15, 1994.}}} @ARTICLE{14-30, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{87-98}}, title = {{The Hyper{\LaTeX} Markup Language}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},HTML,conversion,{\LaTeX},WWW,emacs lisp}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{144}}, author = {{Otfried Schwarzkopf}}, names = {{Otfried Schwarzkopf}}, abstract = {{Hyper{\LaTeX} is a little package that allows you to use {\LaTeX} to prepare documents in HTML (the hypertext markup language used by the World Wide Web), and, at the same time, to produce a fine printed document from your input. You can use all of {\LaTeX}'s power for the printed output, and you don't have to learn a new language for creating hypertext documents.}}} @ARTICLE{14-31, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{99-108}}, title = {{HTML --> {\LaTeX} --> PDF, of de intrede van {\TeX} in het hypertext tijdperk}}, keywords = {{Acrobat,DVIHPS,PDF,repere,recticrt}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{178}}, author = {{Yannis Haralambous}}, names = {{Yannis Haralambous}}, abstract = {{Wij beschrijven hier het produktieproces van elektronische hyper-documenten met behulp van {\LaTeX} en Adobe Acrobat. Na een algemene beschrijving van de voor- en nadelen van {\LaTeX} terzake geven we een omschrijving van elke stap, alsook van zekere te nemen voorzorgen met als doel effici\"ente Acrobat documenten te bekomen. De lezer zal in dit artikel een beschrijving vinden van de software tools DVIPS repere en recticrt, en eveneens de basisprincipes van het formaat PDF. Vertaald door Philippe Vanoverbeke.}}} @ARTICLE{14-32, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{109-119}}, title = {{Adobe Acrobat 2.0; Beyond the bounds op paper}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{239}}, author = {{Wiegert Tierie}}, names = {{Wiegert Tierie}}, } @ARTICLE{14-33, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{120-124}}, title = {{Conversion from WORD/WordPerfect to {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{conversion,MS-WORD,WinWord,WordPerfect,RTF}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{79}}, author = {{Marion Neubauer}}, names = {{Marion Neubauer}}, abstract = {{Production of a large document with many contributors may require conversion of all submitted manuscripts into the same format, for example {\LaTeX}. A large proportion of manuscripts are submitted in the formats of WORD and WordPerfect, two very popular word processing programs. I will discuss different approaches converting such files to {\LaTeX} format. First of all the differences between the word processors MS-WORD and WordPerfect versus the document preparation system {\LaTeX} will be explained, and problems encountered during text conversion into {\LaTeX} will be discussed. The conversion can be done either by means of a seperate program (external conversion) or using macros, style sheets and a printer driver from within the word processors (internal conversion). Advantages and disadvantages of both methods for different types of text elements such as plain text, lists, tables and mathematical formulas will be discussed. This is followed by an overview of the conversion programs currently available.}}} @ARTICLE{14-34, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{125-126}}, title = {{{\TeX}tures: zo goed als gezegd wordt?}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{31}}, author = {{Hans Renkema}}, names = {{Hans Renkema}}, } @ARTICLE{14-35, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{127-128}}, title = {{Scientific Word / Workplace 2.0.1; Whats new?}}, keywords = {{Scientific Word,WYSIWYG,Windows,OS2WIN}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{35}}, author = {{Jan Krugers}}, names = {{Jan Krugers}}, abstract = {{Scientific Word version 1.x from TCI Software Research has gotten improvements and an offspring. The improvements are not only better support for different {\LaTeX} styles and dialects but also more user conveniences and better stability. The offspring is Scientific Workplace, a similar Windows software package under Windows 3.1. But besides all the Scientific Word functions it also has a built-in Maple Version V interface and many Maple symbolic calculation functions. Not to forget that version 2.0.1. works fine under OS/2 Warp with all its speed and data exchange advantages.}}} @ARTICLE{14-36, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{129-130}}, title = {{Scientific WorkPlace; een eerste indruk}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{42}}, author = {{Cees Fortuin}}, names = {{Cees Fortuin}}, abstract = {{Het pakket SCIENTIFIC WORKPLACE. versie 2.0(SWP), vroeger Scientific Word, is een uitgebreide versie van een `WhatYouSeeIsWhatYouGet' tekstverwerker gebaseerd op {\LaTeX}2e en werkend onder Microsoft Windows. De uitbreiding bestaat uit een deel van een `Computer Algebra' pakket, de kernel van Maple. Verder is er een programma om toetsen samen te stellen, uit databestanden met opgaven. Deze voorlopige test van versie 2.0 is uitgevoerd op een IBM compatibele PC, met een 486 processor en 8MBintern geheugen, door een persoon met {\LaTeX} 2.09 en Maple ervaring, maar zonder kennis van MSWindows (`waar is dat nou voor nodig...') of SCIENTIFIC WORKPLACE. Voor het installeren en testen zijn twee volle dagen gebruikt. Dit verslag geeft vanzelfsprekend slechts een eerste indruk van het pakket.}}} @ARTICLE{14-37, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{131-136}}, title = {{Kleurgebruik in TABLE}}, keywords = {{\TaBlE,color tables,tables color,{Con\TeX t} tables}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{64}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{Dit artikel beschrijft enkele macro's die het mogelijk maken binnen TABLE cellen van een tabel van een achtergrondkleur of raster te voorzien. We beperken ons tot een wat technische beschrijving en gaan voorbij aan de esthetische kant van de zaak.}}} @ARTICLE{14-38, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{137-138}}, title = {{{\TeX}-verwerking in kleur}}, keywords = {{{\TeX} visualizing,editing colored {\TeX},color {\TeX} visualization}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{23}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{Vooral beginnende {\TeX}-gebruikers ervaren de mix van commando's en tekst als verwarrend. Mede om die reden hebben wij zo'n vier jaar geleden onze tekstverwerker afgestemd op het gebruik van {\TeX}, door {\TeX}-commando's op een wat afwijkende manier weer te geven. Het blijkt dat, afgezien van aanvullende mogelijkheden om de syntax te controleren, het aantal fouten in commando's drastisch afneemt.}}} @ARTICLE{14-39, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{139-145}}, title = {{Een zwart-wit kijk op kleur}}, keywords = {{color gray conversion,color gray printing,color optimizing use,{Con\TeX t} color palets}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{376}}, author = {{Hans Hagen, Johan Jonker}}, names = {{Hans Hagen, Johan Jonker}}, abstract = {{Wie tegenwoordig op een zwart-wit tv-toestel een uitzending volgt zal zich vaak tevreden moeten stellen met een weinig contrastrijk beeld. Na de introductie van de kleuren-tv is nog lang rekening gehouden met zwart-witkijkers. De keus van kleuren in decors werd mede afgestemd op de weergave in zwart-wit. Dit is niet verwonderlijk, omdat de zwart-witkijkers een ruime meerderheid vormden. Op papier lijkt zich een dergelijke ontwikkeling af te spelen. Voor kleurenprinters geschikte illustraties, kunnen op zwart-wit printers een matig beeld opleveren. Het is dan ook de vraag hoe we aan de `wensen' van de overgrote meerderheid van zwart-wit printers tegemoet kunnen komen.}}} @ARTICLE{14-40, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{146-148}}, title = {{Genezen van WPosis -- nu heb ik chronische {\TeX}itis...}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{75}}, author = {{Herman Haverkort}}, names = {{Herman Haverkort}}, abstract = {{Bij het vormgeven van een voorstel voor reglementen overschreed een verstokte WordPerfect-gebruiker de grenzen van zijn geliefde tekstverwerker. Frans Goddijn hielp hem aan de {\TeX}. In dit artikel geeft een nieuwe {\TeX}-gebruiker een globale indruk van zijn laatste ervaringen met WordPerfect en zijn eerste ervaringen met {\TeX}. Hij doet dit aan de hand van het werk aan een document waarin het mogelijk moest zijn om vele typografische middelen onafhankelijk van elkaar te gebruiken om verschillende soorten passages aan te duiden. Dit bleek in {\TeX} goed te realiseren, zij het met veel inspanning, en het resultaat was zeer bevredigend. Toen het eerste document eenmaal gereed was, bleek het bovendien daarna zeer eenvoudig om soortgelijke documenten te zetten.}}} @ARTICLE{14-41, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{149-155}}, title = {{HH Gets Carried Away; hhmuf, hhflxbox and hhcount}}, keywords = {{circle,counter,dice,footnote,forbidden environment,frame,index}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{137}}, author = {{Herman Haverkort}}, names = {{Herman Haverkort}}, abstract = {{This article presents hhmuf's multinotes: special cheery footnotes to be used in special situations, including so-called `forbidden environments'. Then it presents hhflxbox's self-scaling frames: encircling macros are provided but you can define enwhatevering macros yourself by means of the macros provided by hhflxbox. Finally hhcount is presented: macros to handle simple and composite counters in a fancy way.}}} @ARTICLE{14-42, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{156-162}}, title = {{The Scenario -- in Three Versions; hhparmrk does it}}, keywords = {{paragraph,mark,distribution,select}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{129}}, author = {{Herman Haverkort, Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Herman Haverkort, Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{During work towards a flexible document as a continuous report on a wide variety of contacts for the Meridian Arts Ensemble in New York, Frans Goddijn felt the need to tag and mark certain paragraphs for specific groups of readers. Herman Haverkort wrote a package for {\LaTeX}2e, hhparmrk, which facilitates this by offering the possibility to set various signs next to paragraphs. This article presents hhparmrk, gives examples of its use and a short manual. For the hackers among us some of the {\TeX}nical tricks involved behind the scenes are glanced at.}}} @ARTICLE{14-43, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{163-168}}, title = {{Sorting in {\TeX}'s Mouth}}, keywords = {{expansion,sorting,algorithms}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{81}}, author = {{Bernd Raichle}}, names = {{Bernd Raichle}}, abstract = {{{\TeX}'s macro processor, the so-called mouth, can be used to perform very complex tasks. Because this part of {\TeX}'s programming language is as powerful as a Turing machine, it is possible to implement algorithms using only {\TeX}'s mouth. I will show how sorting algorithms can be implemented in a straight-forward and very elegant and under-standable way using only macros and macro expansion {\TeX}niques.}}} @ARTICLE{14-44, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{169}}, title = {{One by one the guests arrive}}, keywords = {{philosophy,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{23}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A plea is made for writing macros in plain {\TeX} sufficiently documented to be used with all flavours of {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{14-45, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{170-177}}, title = {{BLUe's Format Databases}}, keywords = {{active list separators,addresses,comment blocks,compatible extension,data integrity,databases,FIFO,lazy evaluation,list element tag,mail-merge,number ranges,pattern matching,pictures,plain {\TeX},references,reusable software parts,searching,selective loading,set macros,software engineering,table of contents,variant document parts}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{102}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The backgrounds, use, and coding of BLUe's Format Databases have been discussed. Two kinds of databases have been introduced class I (data, such as addresses, references, and script parts for example pictures), and class II (macros, such as variant formats and tools). At the heart lies the selective loading {\TeX}nique, which allows that only what is needed will be loaded on-the-fly. The data structures and operations on them have been treated. The use within the {Con\TeX t} of typesetting scripts have been elucidated via examples. At the end the coding is explained.}}} @ARTICLE{14-46, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{178-186}}, title = {{BLUe's Index}}, keywords = {{compatible extension,index,number ranges,one-pass job,ordering table,plain {\TeX},reusable software parts,software engineering,sort keys}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{117}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The creation of a modest index within a one-pass {\TeX} job is proposed. In general a proof run and a final run are needed. The markup for the index entries is the same as used by Knuth for The {\TeX}book. The process is controlled by the tags: \texttt{\sortindex} and \texttt{\pasteupindex}. The file which emerges after \texttt{\sortindex} can be enriched by hand, for example to include `see also' and the like. Sorting keys can be specified too, as well as items which have to be ignored for the sorting. The macros have been developed for use with English documents. To leave open the use with other languages the ordering has been parameterized in an ordering table.}}} @ARTICLE{14-47, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{187-192}}, title = {{BLUe's Letters}}, keywords = {{active list separators,addresses,compatible extension,databases,data integrity,FIFO,lazy evaluation,letter,list element tag,mail-merge,pattern matching,plain {\TeX},reusable software parts,set macros,software engineering}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{73}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The backgrounds, use, design, and coding of BLUe's Letters format have been discussed. The purpose is to format a letter, merge it with address(es) from a database, and typeset it all with the appropriate background such as logo and the like, completely within {\TeX}. Separate labels can be obtained too, either specified by name or searched for by pattern.}}} @ARTICLE{14-48, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{193-199}}, title = {{BLUe's Reports}}, keywords = {{active list separators,compatible extension,databases,data integrity,FIFO,house style,lazy evaluation,list element tag,pattern matching,plain {\TeX},reusable software parts,separation of concerns,set macros,software engineering}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{81}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The backgrounds, use, design, and coding of BLUe's Reports format have been discussed. The purpose is to format a report as a compatible extension of the default note format of BLUe's format. As such it is an example of how to customize BLUe's format system with a format of your own. The differences have to do with not only using titles but also reusing the titles for table of contents, list of examples, and running headlines the preliminary pages and cover pages which are absent with the default note format appendices may contain collected information from the script such as answer to the exercises (similar as in The {\TeX}book), table of examples, table of contents, and an index.}}} @ARTICLE{14-49, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{200-204}}, title = {{Paradigms: Two-part macros}}, keywords = {{BLUe format,catcodes,multiple use of copy,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{73}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The use of two-part macros in BLUe's format is discussed. First the reason why in general two-part macros are beneficial is explained. Practical examples from the {\TeX}-NL discussion list have been treated. The automatically generation of a one-part macro on top of two-part macros is given. The impossibility of reusing copy with different catcodes in {\TeX} is mentioned and illustrated with an example from the {\TeX}book.}}} @ARTICLE{14-50, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{205-207}}, title = {{Paradigms: Parameterization I -- options}}, keywords = {{BLUe format,optional parameters,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{58}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The use of options in BLUe's format is discussed. A survey is given of how Knuth coped with the functionality of optional arguments in {\TeX} and manmac. As an extension to {\TeX}'s \texttt{\every} the BLUe's \texttt{\this}s are introduced, with the advantage of simpler handling of arguments. It is contrasted with the use in TUGboat's style files and AMS's ppt.sty.}}} @ARTICLE{14-51, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{208-210}}, title = {{BLUe's Typesetting of PASCAL}}, keywords = {{compatible extension,FIFO,Pascal,pattern matching,plain {\TeX},pretty-printing,reusable software parts,software engineering}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{45}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The formatting of PASCAL programs within plain {\TeX} is proposed. Only \texttt{\beginpascal} and \texttt{\endpascal} have to be added as markup. In general the literate programming tools are to be preferred, especially when designing, developing, documenting, and maintaining professional software.}}} @ARTICLE{14-52, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{211}}, title = {{TUG'95}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{26}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{14-53, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{212-213}}, title = {{Reisverslag Bacho{\TeX}'95}}, keywords = {{Bacho{\TeX},report,GUST,Poland}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{81}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{Verslag bijeenkomst Poolse {\TeX} users group GUST.}}} @ARTICLE{14-54, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{217}}, title = {{Euro{\TeX}'95}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},conference,announcement}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{14}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{22}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Announcement of Euro{\TeX}'95 conference.}}} @BOOK{maps15, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-22}}, title = {{MAPS 95.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{15}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{1675}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{15-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-4}}, title = {{Verslag (1995/2)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{15}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{56}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Opening 15e NTG bijeenkomst 24 mei 1995; Verslag NTG bijeenkomst van 17 november 1994; Ingekomen stukken en mededelingen; NTG ledenvergadering; Verslag commissie voor kascontrole / vaststelling nieuwe commissie; Bestuursverkiezingen; Euro{\TeX}'95; Miscellaneous; Rondvraag en sluiting; Voordrachten.}}} @ARTICLE{15-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{5}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1995/2)}}, keywords = {{chairman}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{15}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{14}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, } @ARTICLE{15-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{6}}, title = {{Van de TUG President (1995)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{15}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{14}}, author = {{Michel Goossens}}, names = {{Michel Goossens}}, } @ARTICLE{15-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7}}, title = {{Concept begroting 1996}}, keywords = {{budget}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{15}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{17}}, author = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, } @ARTICLE{15-5, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{8-13}}, title = {{Verslag 16e TUG-bijeenkomst}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,St. Petersburg,Florida}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{15}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{1471}}, author = {{Wietse Dol, Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Wietse Dol, Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{15-6, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{14-20}}, title = {{TUG'95 at St. Petersburg Beach -- a Personal View}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,St. Petersburg,Florida}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{15}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{77}}, author = {{Michel Goossens}}, names = {{Michel Goossens}}, } @ARTICLE{15-7, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{21-22}}, title = {{Euro{\TeX}'95 in Nederland!}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},conference,Arnhem}}, year = {{1995}}, volume = {{15}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{57}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, abstract = {{Programma en inschrijfformulier Euro{\TeX} conferentie.}}} @PROCEEDINGS{euro95, type = {{proceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{1-441}}, title = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}}, keywords = {{NTG,Euro{\TeX},conference,proceedings,Arnhem}}, year = {{1995}}, series = {{MAPS Special Editions}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{6708}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, abstract = {{Proceedings Euro{\TeX}'95 in Arnhem}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-1, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{1-4}}, title = {{Graphics for {\TeX}: a new implementation}}, keywords = {{graphics,picture environment,\special}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{200}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Andrey Astrelin}}, names = {{Andrey Astrelin}}, } @INPROCEEDINGS{E-2, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{5-10}}, title = {{{\TeX} Plotter -- a program for creating 2D and 3D pictures}}, keywords = {{graphics 3D,pictures,graphics,plotting}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{430}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Alexander Berdnikov, S. Turtia}}, names = {{Alexander Berdnikov, S. Turtia}}, abstract = {{The MS DOS program which creates 2D and 3D {\TeX} pictures for the plots of functions of two variables f(x,y) is described. In comparison with Gnuplot this program enables to plot the equilines (2D view) and the surface (3D view) pictures correctly and without memory overflow even for complex cases. The input is the ASCII file which contains the data points (Xij, Yij, Zij) of the function z = f(x,y) calculated over non-regular quadrangular mesh. The output is the ASCII file which contains the required picture in {\TeX} format. The program has a flexible menu driven user interface and enables to create and to preview the output pictures with a variety of styles. At the time being the program supports {\LaTeX} commands, EPIC/EEPIC macros and em{\TeX} specials. In future the program should support {\TeX} graphical tools like MFPiC, PiC{\TeX} and EPS-files.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-3, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{11-16}}, title = {{VFComb -- a program for design of virtual fonts}}, keywords = {{virtual fonts,VFcomb}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{264}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Alexander Berdnikov, S. Turtia}}, names = {{Alexander Berdnikov, S. Turtia}}, abstract = {{The MS DOS program which enables to simplify the design of the virtual fonts is described. Its main purpose was to facilitate the integration of CM-fonts with cyrillic LL-fonts created by O. Lapko and S. Strelkov but it can be used for various applications. It uses the information from TFM-files (converted to ASCII form by TFtoPL) and the ASCII data files created by the User on its input, and produces the VPL-file on its output which can be converted to the virtual font using VPtoVF. The characteristic feature of the program is that it can assemble the font ligature tables and user defined ligature tables for the characters extracted from various fonts and combine the metric information from various TFM-files. VFComb supports the full syntaxis of PL-files and VPL-files as it was defined by D.E. Knuth and adds new commands like symbolic variables or conditional operators, which simplifies the creation and the debugging of the virtual fonts.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-4, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{17-26}}, title = {{The status of Babel}}, keywords = {{Babel,multilingual}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{282}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, abstract = {{In this article I will give an overview of what has happened to Babel lately. First I will briefly describe the history of Babel; then I will introduce the concept of `shorthands'. New ways of changing the `language' have been introduced and Babel can now easily be adapted for local needs. Finally I will discuss some compatibility issues.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-5, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{27-34}}, title = {{Upages -- plain {\TeX} for professionals}}, keywords = {{typography,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{254}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Stanis{\l}aw Brabec}}, names = {{Stanis{\l}aw Brabec}}, abstract = {{When I have started my professional typography works in plain {\TeX}, I found many things, which are done in each document. Some of them are language specific or trivial, but there exists many topics, which are strongly untrivial, and often required. {\TeX} has many limitations, but there is (in recent time) nothing better in whole the world. Thus, we have powerful macro language but we haven't easy way to do many things: references, contents, page offsetting, interpretation of text token by token, cooperation with PostScript devices, device independent color and line drawing capabilities, easy box rotation and landscaping, making sheets and booklets, making other margins than 1in, creating cropmarks, color signatures, color separations etc.\\ Certainly, there is many powerful macro systems, but they are very big, often slow, and cancels many capabilities of plain {\TeX}. I have been particularly inspired by them, and particularly by some macros for plain {\TeX}. But many of these macros are incompatible, if you want to use two of them, because one overwrites settings of the second.\\ This all is good reason to write powerful macros these things instead of creating trivial macros twice a month. Then you needn't spend much time to correct bugs caused by these trivial macros. That's why I have written my upages.{\TeX} macros. This chapter doesn't want to be a manual to these macros, but only an introduction with examples.\\ upages.{\TeX} macros consists on more parts. In this text I will describe the most powerful and interesting parts of them. I hope that my macros will greet many plain {\TeX}ists. They makes easy to prepare documents and to make hooks and patches.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-6, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{35-104}}, title = {{A practical introduction to SGML}}, keywords = {{SGML,HTML,WWW,DTD,ISO8879}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{808}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Michel Goossens, Janne Saarela}}, names = {{Michel Goossens, Janne Saarela}}, abstract = {{SGML, the Standard Generalized Markup Language, deals with the structural markup of electronic documents. It was made an international standard by ISO in October 1986. SGML soon became very popular thanks in particular to its enthusiastic acceptance in the editing world, by large multi-national companies, governmental organizations, and, more recently, by the ubiquity of HTML, Hypertext Markup Language, the source language of structured documents on WWW. This article discusses the basic ideas of SGML and looks at a few interesting tools. It should provide the reader with a better understanding of the latest developments in the field of electronic documents in general, and of SGML/HTML in particular.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-7, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{105-168}}, title = {{From {\LaTeX} to HTML and back}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX}2HTML,HTML,{\LaTeX},translation,conversion,tools}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{891}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Michel Goossens, Janne Saarela}}, names = {{Michel Goossens, Janne Saarela}}, abstract = {{Both {\LaTeX} and HTML are languages that can express the structure of a document, and similarities between these two systems are shown. A detailed study is made of the {\LaTeX}2HTML program, written by Nikos Drakos, that is today the most complete utility for translating {\LaTeX} code into HTML, providing a quasi-automatic translation for most elements. A discussion of a few other tools for translating between HTML and {\LaTeX} concludes the article.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-8, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{169-180}}, title = {{Pascal: formatting Pascal using {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{Pascal,formatting,program code}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{355}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Pedro Palao Gostanza, Manuel N\'u\~nez Garc{\'\i}a}}, names = {{Pedro Palao Gostanza, Manuel N\'u\~nez Garc{\'\i}a}}, abstract = {{This paper is based on our ideas about how a system which formats programs written in a structured language must work. Particularly, tools which help in typesetting texts where algorithms are described. Most of our ideas have been put in practice in the pascal system, which automatize the elegant layout of Pascal programs. This system is programmed as a {\TeX} macro package.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-9, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{181-196}}, title = {{Beyond the bounds of paper and within the bounds of screens; the perfect match of {\TeX} and Acrobat}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{451}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, } @INPROCEEDINGS{E-10, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{197-222}}, title = {{PPCH{\TeX}: typesetting chemical formulas in {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{337}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}}, names = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}}, abstract = {{This article is about a package for typesetting chemical formulas. The primary interface of this package is in the dutch language. Because PPCH{\TeX} has a multilingual interface, all commands and keywords can be toggled to english. The Dutch version of this article is published in NTG's MAPS (94.2) and is translated to English by H. de Weert.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-11, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{223-238}}, title = {{{\LaTeX}, HTML and PDF, or the entry of {\TeX} into the world of hypertext}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},HTML,PDF,hyper{\TeX}}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{381}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Yannis Haralambous, Sebastian Rahtz}}, names = {{Yannis Haralambous, Sebastian Rahtz}}, abstract = {{An onverview of the relation between {\LaTeX}, HTML (WWW) and PDF is presented.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-12, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{239-256}}, title = {{The release 1.2 of the Cork encoded DC fonts and the text companion symbol fonts}}, keywords = {{DC fonts,TS1 text symbol encoding}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{812}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{J\"org Knappen}}, names = {{J\"org Knappen}}, abstract = {{I present the release 1.2 of the dc fonts and the companion text symbol fonts. I give an overview of the improvements on the dc fonts from version 1.1 to 1.2. The rationale for introducing a text symbol font is explained and the text symbol encoding TS1 is presented. In the appendix, there are font tables of the mentioned fonts.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-13, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{257-272}}, title = {{A METAFONT--EPS interface}}, keywords = {{METAFONT,PostScript,MFtoEPS}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{522}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Bogus{\l}aw Jackowski}}, names = {{Bogus{\l}aw Jackowski}}, abstract = {{The MFtoEPS package enables METAFONT to produce EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) output.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-14, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{273-278}}, title = {{Use of {\TeX} as database with Any{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{active list separators,addresses,comment blocks,compatible extension,data integrity,databases,FIFO,lazy evaluation,list element tag,mail-merge,number ranges,pattern matching,pictures,plain {\TeX},references,reusable software parts,searching,selective loading,set macros,software engineering,table of contents,variant document parts}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{278}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The use of BLUe's format databases is treated. A new issue is introduced since the emerge of BLUe's Format system this spring. Boolean tags can be added to for example address.dat entries to denote fields and their contents. Together with \texttt{\search} one can easily obtain the list of names -- and via these names the full entries, i.e., the addresses -- of those who have not paid their membership fee, for example.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-15, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{279-288}}, title = {{Indexing in {\TeX} with Any{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{compatible extension,index,number ranges,one-pass job,ordering table,plain {\TeX},reusable software parts,software engineering,sort keys}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{294}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The creation of a modest index within a one-pass {\TeX} job is treated. In general a proof run and a final run are needed.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-16, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{289-294}}, title = {{A Russian style for Babel: problems and solutions}}, keywords = {{Babel,Russian,typography}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{279}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Olga Lapko, Irina Makhovaya}}, names = {{Olga Lapko, Irina Makhovaya}}, abstract = {{As with other languages using nonlatin basis there are some typographic features and national peculiarities that must be shown in the style. The paper describes the Russian style with macros \texttt{\captionrussian} for four standard Russian documents, \texttt{\daterussian}, \texttt{\Asbuk} and \texttt{\asbuk} for Russian alphabet counters and \texttt{\mathrussian} for Russian math operators. Some problems concerning the usage of this style (e.g. usage of different encodings) are described.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-17, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{295-308}}, title = {{Data with da{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{databases,data manipulating,filtering,ASCII}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{285}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Andries Lenstra, Steven Kliffen, Ruud Koning}}, names = {{Andries Lenstra, Steven Kliffen, Ruud Koning}}, abstract = {{The authors explain how to handle data in {\TeX} documents, in particular, how to avoid ever having to type in -- and check! -- the same data or text twice. These data may be stored in ordinary (non-{\TeX}) databases, in ASCII files arranged according to the easy da{\TeX} format, or in the {\TeX} document itself. da{\TeX} works in plain {\TeX} and is supposed to work in {\LaTeX}.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-18, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{309-314}}, title = {{Modifying {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},modifications}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{242}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{{\LaTeX}3 project team}}, names = {{{\LaTeX}3 project team}}, abstract = {{This is an updated version of a document that was first written to be part of the distribution of the new standard {\LaTeX}. It was produced in response to suggestions that the modification and distribution conditions for the files in our system should be similar to those implied by Version 2 of the GNU General Public Licence, as published by the Free Software Foundation.\\ Although we are by now convinced that the principles described here are sound, the detailed consequences of these for the distribution and modification conditions are still evolving. Thus this article should not be treated as a definitive version of these conditions, even at the date of its publication.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-19, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{315-316}}, title = {{The proposed {\TeX} Directory Structure}}, keywords = {{TDS,standardization}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{156}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Joachim Schrod}}, names = {{Joachim Schrod}}, abstract = {{The concept of a standardized {\TeX} directory structure is explained.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-20, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{317-330}}, title = {{Occam's Razor and macro management}}, keywords = {{Occam's Razor,macro management,plain {\TeX},{\TeX} typescripts,electronic publishing,docstrip,{\LaTeX}}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{311}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Laurent Siebenmann}}, names = {{Laurent Siebenmann}}, abstract = {{The philosophical principle known as Occam's Razor asserts that entities should not be multiplied beyond necessity. The {\TeX} utility OCCAM is a tool to eliminate from a collection of supporting {\TeX} macros (composite commands) those that are unnecessary in a given typescript. Hopefully, it will serve to (a) let Plain {\TeX} users produce typescripts which can be electronically posted in a compact form that is nevertheless autonomous and perfectly archival, and (b) to simplify a macro package before making modifications for a special purpose.\\ The OCCAM utility will ultimately be programmed entirely in {\TeX} language to assure that it is universally available. Today it is just an evolving prototype implemented with a bit of help from an editor (on Macintosh) that has a programmable control language based on GREP.\\ To achieve reasonably automatic functioning of OCCAM, not requiring surveillance by a {\TeX} programmer, it is necessary to maintain a carefully structured master version of each macro package involved; this .occ version can double as the documented source version of the package.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-21, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{331-338}}, title = {{A package for Church-Slavonic typesetting}}, keywords = {{Church-Slavonik}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{301}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Andrey Slepuhin}}, names = {{Andrey Slepuhin}}, abstract = {{The multilingual ability of {\TeX} is one of its most important properties. Due to {\TeX} it became possible to produce high-quality books in many different languages (sometimes with very exotic grammatic rules). For more than 10 years of its existence {\TeX} became a real polyglot and it seems that it doesn't want to stop evaluating. In this paper one more, may be rather exotic, example of practical usage of {\TeX} is considered, and also many ideas and solutions which result from 5-year experience of {\TeX} using.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-22, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{339-350}}, title = {{The W95 environment}}, keywords = {{Windows,typesetting proceedings,non-{\TeX}-users}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{337}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Anton{\'\i}n Strejc}}, names = {{Anton{\'\i}n Strejc}}, abstract = {{Since 1992 the ``WORKSHOP 9x'' seminar takes place at the Czech Technical University (CTU) every year. The aim of this wide seminar is to give all the CTU researchers or teams an oportunity to present their research projects in twenty minutes of speech and two pages of proceedings of the seminar. I solved the technical problem of making the proceedings using {\LaTeX}. As the number of contributions increases year by year and the time for making the book is limited some automation of the typesetting process was and still is necessary. The W94 and W95 are attempts to transfer part of the typesetting work from the final typesetter to the authors. The W9x is simple single-purpose user-interface between {\LaTeX} and the MS-DOS user who may know nothing about {\TeX} and {\LaTeX}. Some experiences (both technical and psychological) of using this system in the two last years are discussed in the paper and may be useful for organizers of seminars, conferences etc. where contributors are not {\TeX} users and the proceedings are to be made with {\TeX}.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-23, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{351-358}}, title = {{MusiX{\TeX}, even more beautiful than Music{\TeX} for music typesetting}}, keywords = {{Music{\TeX},MusiX{\TeX},music}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{304}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Daniel Taupin}}, names = {{Daniel Taupin}}, abstract = {{MusiX{\TeX} is a new music typesetting package derived from Music{\TeX}, but it provides more beautiful scores than Music{\TeX} did. While Music{\TeX} was a single pass package, MusiX{\TeX} is a three pass system: the first pass performs a rough {\TeX}ing which reports the spacings of each music section, the second pass is a computation of the best note spacings, and the third one is the final {\TeX}ing process. The beauty of single notes does not significantly differ from Music{\TeX}, but slurs are much more beautiful, and notes are regularly spaced instead of being irregularly spaced with glue.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-24, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{359-370}}, title = {{e-{\TeX}: a 100%-compatible successor to {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{e-{\TeX},NTS,extended {\TeX},extensions,compatibility}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{284}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Philip Taylor}}, names = {{Philip Taylor}}, abstract = {{e-{\TeX} is the first concrete result of an international research \& development project, the NTS Project, which was established under the aegis of DANTE during 1992. The aims of the project are to perpetuate and develop the spirit and philosophy of {\TeX}, whilst respecting Knuth's wish that {\TeX} itself should remain frozen.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-25, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{371-390}}, title = {{Adobe Acrobat 2.0: Beyond the bounds of paper}}, keywords = {{Acrobat,PDF}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{429}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Wiegert Tierie}}, names = {{Wiegert Tierie}}, abstract = {{An overview of the concept and features of Adobe Acrobat is given.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-26, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{391-424}}, title = {{Typesetting commutative diagrams}}, keywords = {{commutative diagrams,macro packages}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{752}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Gabriel Valiente Feruglio}}, names = {{Gabriel Valiente Feruglio}}, abstract = {{There have been several efforts aimed at providing {\TeX} and its derivatives with a suitable mechanism for typesetting commutative diagrams, with the consequent availability of several macro packages of widespread use in the category theory community, and a long debate about the best syntax to adopt for commutative diagrams in {\LaTeX}3 has taken place during 1993 in the CATEGORIES discussion list. From the user's point of view, however, there is not much guidance when it comes to choosing a macro package, and even after a decision is made, the conversion of diagrams from the particular conventions of a macro package to another macro package's conventions may prove to be rather hard.\\ Typesetting commutative diagrams is a surprisingly difficult problem, in comparison with {\TeX} macro packages for other purposes, as judged by the amount of code needed and years of development invested. The existing macro packages for typesetting commutative diagrams are reviewed in this paper and they are compared according to several criteria, among them the capability to produce complex diagrams, quality of the output diagrams, ease of use, quality of documentation, installation procedures, resource requirements, availability, and portability. The compatibility of the different macro packages is also analyzed.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-27, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{425-430}}, title = {{Conversion of the Euler METAFONTs into the PostScript Type1 language}}, keywords = {{METAFONT,PostScript,Type 1 fonts,conversion}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{229}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Erik-Jan Vens}}, names = {{Erik-Jan Vens}}, abstract = {{A report of the process of converting Hermann Zapf's Euler fonts from METAFONT sources to PostScript Type1 format.}}} @INPROCEEDINGS{E-28, type = {{inproceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{431-441}}, title = {{When METAFONT does it alone}}, keywords = {{METAFONT,graphics}}, year = {{1995}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European &tex; Conference}}, size = {{288}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, author = {{Ji{\v r}{\'\i} Zlatu{\v s}ka}}, names = {{Ji{\v r}{\'\i} Zlatu{\v s}ka}}, abstract = {{Combining METAFONT and {\TeX} when typesetting text and graphics together is shown on several occasions to bring very impressive results. A. Hoenig presented a method for communication between {\TeX} and METAFONT in order to solve two problems otherwise difficult to handle within {\TeX} or METAFONT alone: label placement for diagrams generated by METAFONT, and curvilinear typesetting. We show that the method for curvilinear typesetting (involving three passes in Hoenig's approach) can be considerably simplified by using the extended ligature mechanism of {\TeX} 3, and that a single METAFONT pass is actually sufficient, with quite a simple interface on {\TeX}'s side. Institutional seal text placement can be realized as a simple METAFONT application using this method. While PostScript offers ready-to-use easy solutions to this class of problems, METAFONT solutions can still be preferable to PostScript because of the ability of adding META-ness, e.g., by introducing second-order magnitude corrections/distortions to the letters and/or logos in order to enhance legibility when used in smaller sizes.}}} @BOOK{maps16, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-139}}, title = {{MAPS 96.1}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{1463}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{16-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-2}}, title = {{Verslag (1996/1)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{46}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Opening 16e NTG bijeenkomst 5 september 1995; Verslag NTG bijeenkomst van 24 mei 1995; Ingekomen stukken en mededelingen; Begroting 1996; Verslag TUG'95; Rondvraag en sluiting; Volgende bijeenkomsten.}}} @ARTICLE{16-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{3}}, title = {{Het weten waard}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{37}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{16-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{4}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1996/1)}}, keywords = {{chairman}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{18}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, } @ARTICLE{16-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{5-6}}, title = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1996/1)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{18}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes, Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes, Wietse Dol}}, } @ARTICLE{16-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7-8}}, title = {{Financieel verslag 1995}}, keywords = {{financial report}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{51}}, author = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, } @ARTICLE{16-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{9-11}}, title = {{Jaarverslag NTG}}, keywords = {{report NTG}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{68}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{16-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{12-13}}, title = {{Van de TUG President (1996)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{19}}, author = {{Michel Goossens}}, names = {{Michel Goossens}}, } @ARTICLE{16-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{14-15}}, title = {{Bericht van FGBBS}}, keywords = {{BBS,internet}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{20}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Een beschouwing over de vraag of, sinds de opkomst van Internet, er nog behoefte is een een BBS systeem. De voorlopige conclusie luidt dat een BBS op regionaal en klein-nationaal gebied een prettige aanvulling kan zijn op hetgeen het Internet te bieden heeft.}}} @ARTICLE{16-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{16}}, title = {{A plug-and-play te{\TeX} CD-ROM}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{11}}, author = {{Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz}}, names = {{Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz}}, abstract = {{GUTenberg and UKTUG, in collaboration with TUG and NTG, are producing a plug-and-play CD-ROM based on Thomas Esser's te{\TeX} distribution. It adheres to the TDS ({\TeX} Directory Structure) tree structure (see, for instance, TUGboat 16(4), pages 401-412).}}} @ARTICLE{16-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{17-23}}, title = {{Attending Euro{\TeX}'95 in Papendal}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},conference,Arnhem}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{105}}, author = {{Michel Goossens}}, names = {{Michel Goossens}}, abstract = {{Report of Euro{\TeX}'95 conference in Arnhem.}}} @ARTICLE{16-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{24-25}}, title = {{Bacho{\TeX} 1996}}, keywords = {{Bacho{\TeX},report,GUST,Poland}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{46}}, author = {{Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{Verslag bijeenkomst Poolse {\TeX} users group GUST.}}} @ARTICLE{16-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{26-29}}, title = {{The 17th Annual {\TeX} Users Group Meeting}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,Dubna}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{83}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{16-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{30-32}}, title = {{De kunst van het programmeren}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{154}}, author = {{Dirk van Delft}}, names = {{Dirk van Delft}}, abstract = {{Sinds 1962 werkt Donald Knuth aan een informaticabijbel die over twintig jaar af moet zijn. Tussendoor ontwierp hij een tekstververwerker met eigen typografie en legde hij een Mona Lisa uit dominosteentjes.}}} @ARTICLE{16-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{33-37}}, title = {{An Interview with Donald Knuth}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{94}}, author = {{Jack Woehr}}, names = {{Jack Woehr}}, } @ARTICLE{16-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{38-49}}, title = {{Knuth meets NTG members}}, keywords = {{Knuth,dutch,visit,interview,NTG}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{201}}, author = {{Christina Thiele}}, names = {{Christina Thiele}}, abstract = {{On January 6th 1996, Kees van der Laan informed the NTG that Donald Knuth would be in Holland in March. Knuth was invited by the Mathematisch Centrum (MC, nowadays called Centrum voor Wiskunde en Infor-matica, CWI) because of CWI's 50th anniversary. Both Knuth and Mandelbrot were invited as speakers at the celebration. The NTG noticed that this was an exceptional occasion to organize a special meeting with Knuth for all Dutch {\TeX} and METAFONT users who would like to meet the Grand Wizard himself. Fortunately Knuth accepted the NTG invitation and so a meeting was organized in `De Rode Hoed' in Amsterdam on March 13th. About 35 people from all over the country and even from Belgium joined to meet Knuth. Everything was recorded on both video and audio tape by Gerard van Nes. Christina Thiele volunteered to write this transcript.}}} @ARTICLE{16-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{50-53}}, title = {{{\TeX} without 4{\TeX} on the PC}}, keywords = {{4{\TeX},configuring,DOSKEY,GhostScript}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{26}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{An example of a command-line interface for an existing 4{\TeX} installation. Configuration involves defining environment variables and DOSKEY macros. This simplicity comes at the cost of greater dependence on PostScript/GhostScript and the loss of some advanced features.}}} @ARTICLE{16-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{54-56}}, title = {{Van dictaat tot boek}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{63}}, author = {{Cees Fortuin}}, names = {{Cees Fortuin}}, abstract = {{In 1980 werd ik docent natuurkunde aan de HTS te Arnhem voor de afdeling elektrotechniek. Toendertijd werd een leerboek gebruikt dat heel aardig de meer traditionele componenten behandelde, maar bijna niets wist te melden over wat tegenwoordig in een schakeling zit: dioden, transistoren en dat soort componenten. Een eerste navraag bij landelijke collega's leverde wel een soort werkgroepje op, maar niet de gezochte `nieuwe' leerstof. Dus maar zelf schrijven. Dat moet in eerste instantie letterlijk worden opgevat, maar ook met een tekstverwerker als {\LaTeX} moet veel zelf worden gedaan. Wat begon rond 1985 als dictaat, per hoofdstuk afgedrukt, eindigde rond 1995 als boek: twee delen `Elektron natuurkunde' in de serie natuurkunde voor het HBO bij de Educatieve Uitgevers.}}} @ARTICLE{16-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{57}}, title = {{Enkele ervaringen met {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{12}}, author = {{Rom Pijlgroms}}, names = {{Rom Pijlgroms}}, abstract = {{Ter sprake komen de persoonlijke ervaringen met {\LaTeX} rond onder meer de uitwerkingen en antwoorden-boeken van de methode `Wiskunde voor het hoger onderwijs' (R. van Asselt, e.a., uitgave van: Educatieve Partners Nederland BV), de ervaringen met betrekking tot verzorgde bijscholingscursussen {\LaTeX} t.b.v. het personeel van de faculteit en de overige tekstverwerkingsactiviteiten.}}} @ARTICLE{16-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{58}}, title = {{Een {\LaTeX}-cursus in Groningen}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{13}}, author = {{Rein Smedinga}}, names = {{Rein Smedinga}}, abstract = {{Begin mei heeft bij de afdeling wiskunde en informatica van de Rijksuniversiteit Groningen voor de tiende keer een {\LaTeX}-cursus plaatsgehad. Onderstaand een kort relaas over het ontstaan van deze cursus en het doel ervan.}}} @ARTICLE{16-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{59}}, title = {{Het gebruik van {\LaTeX} voor wiskunde lessen}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{35}}, author = {{Ben Geels}}, names = {{Ben Geels}}, } @ARTICLE{16-31, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{60}}, title = {{Van ms-troff naar {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, author = {{Piet Tutelaers}}, names = {{Piet Tutelaers}}, } @ARTICLE{16-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{61-73}}, title = {{The {\LaTeX}2HTML translator: An Overview}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{172}}, author = {{Herbert Swan}}, names = {{Herbert Swan}}, abstract = {{{\LaTeX}2HTML is, as its name implies, a translator which converts a standard {\LaTeX} document into Hypertext Markup Language (HTML), for incorporation into the World-Wide Web. Like {\LaTeX}, it is freely available software, supported by highly dedicated volunteers. Unlike {\LaTeX}, it is currently available only on UNIX platforms.}}} @ARTICLE{16-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{74-75}}, title = {{Zijn Scientific Word en {\TeX} uitwisselbaar?}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{55}}, author = {{Jan Jacobs, Jan-Egbert Sturm}}, names = {{Jan Jacobs, Jan-Egbert Sturm}}, } @ARTICLE{16-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{76-81}}, title = {{Typografisch programmeren}}, keywords = {{typographic programming,database publishing,{Con\TeX t} interactive documents,screen design,interactive documents}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{180}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{In dit artikel wordt de ontwikkeling van een interactief document beschreven. De getoonde voorbeelden demonstreren de kracht van {\TeX} als typografische programmeertaal. Omdat dergelijke documenten het moeten opnemen tegen (vaak dedicated) programma's, kan het ontwikkelen ervan worden omschreven als typografisch programmeren.}}} @ARTICLE{16-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{82-84}}, title = {{Paradigms: It's all in the game}}, keywords = {{BLUe format,dialogue with {\TeX},games,plain {\TeX},user interface}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{43}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{With the game tic-tac-toe as example it is shown how to dialogue with {\TeX}. Three versions of a macro are discussed. The first prototype implements the bare-to-the-bones game. The other versions have increasingly better user interfaces and more intelligence implemented.}}} @ARTICLE{16-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{85-90}}, title = {{Paradigms: The winds and halfwinds -- Details matter}}, keywords = {{binary tree,BLUe format,graphics,plain {\TeX},recursion,trinary tree,turtle graphics}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{94}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The implementation of the turtle graphics idea in plain {\TeX} as part of BLUe's format graphics facilities has been discussed. Examples are the (recursive) coding of the Pythagorian and trinary trees. As spin-off the implementation of a (binary) chart -- a binary tree with labels -- is given. Rotation of trees goes simply by renaming the wind directions.}}} @ARTICLE{16-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{91-99}}, title = {{BLUe-2-{\LaTeX} -- expansion and some more}}, keywords = {{BLUe script,conversion,MAPS,mouth processing,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{113}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Conversion should not be a problem. It is best to use a general accepted tool, which comes with a preprint format. Until BLUe's format is generally accepted a BLUe script has to converted to comply with publishers' formats to get it out. Conversion via {\TeX}'s expansion is exercised in this note, with as result a plain {\TeX} Convertor Assistant, in the spirit of AWK. In netland it does not matter because BLUe's format system is available from CTAN and NTG's 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM, and therefore everybody can format BLUe scripts, and no conversion is needed.}}} @ARTICLE{16-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{100-107}}, title = {{Graphics and {\TeX} -- a reappraisal of METAFONT}}, keywords = {{computer art,constructivism,graphics,Hilbert,hidden lines,METAFONT,PostScript,projection}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{137}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{It is all about the author's first steps in METAFONT, for creating graphics to be included in {\TeX} documents, with a wink to . The graphics comprises 2D pictures and 2.5D images of 3D objects via projection techniques. Learning METAFONT was much easier than learning {\TeX}. Included examples are: cat, Hilbert curve, and Gabo's linear construction in space no 2. A few highlights on macro writing in METAFONT have been selected. The appendix contains the table of contents of my anthology.mf file of examples.}}} @ARTICLE{16-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{108-125}}, title = {{Page layout in {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{167}}, author = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, names = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, abstract = {{This article describes how to customize the page layout of your {\LaTeX} documents, i.e how to change page margings and sizes, headers and footers, and the proper placement of figures and tables (collectively called floats) on the page. Originally this was the documentation of the fancyheadings package. It did contain also other info, e.g. advanced use of marks. It has now been upgraded to include more, e.g. the handling of floats. The fancyheadings documentation has been upgraded to conform to version 2 of this package 1 . For reasons of compatibility with certain operating systems, the name of the package has been changed to fancyhdr. Although this paper uses {\LaTeX}2e commands, most of the techniques can be used with older {\LaTeX} versions with appropriate changes.}}} @ARTICLE{16-30, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{126-139}}, title = {{Colored Verbatim}}, keywords = {{visualizing {\TeX},{Con\TeX t} verbatim,color verbatim,{\TeX} visualizing}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{16}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{85}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{This module implements (just another) verbatim environment. Especially when the output of {\TeX} is viewed on an electronic medium, coloring has a positive influence on the readability of {\TeX} sources. About half of the module is therefore dedicated to typesetting {\TeX} specific character sequences in color. In this article I'll present some macro's for typesetting inline, display and file verbatim. The macro's are capable of handling too.}}} @BOOK{maps17, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-175}}, title = {{MAPS 96.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{1504}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{17-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-3}}, title = {{Verslag (1996/2)}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{30}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Opening 17e NTG bijeenkomst 1 juni 1996; Notulen van de zestiende bijeenkomst van 5 september 1995; Ingekomen stukken en mededelingen; NTG ledenvergadering; Verslag commissie voor kascontrol en vaststelling nieuwe commissie voor kascontrole; Bestuursverkiezingen; Miscellanious; Rondvraag en sluiting.}}} @ARTICLE{17-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{4}}, title = {{Het weten waard}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{37}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{17-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{5}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1996/2)}}, keywords = {{chairman}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{15}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, } @ARTICLE{17-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{6}}, title = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1996/2)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{32}}, author = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, } @ARTICLE{17-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7}}, title = {{Concept begroting 1997}}, keywords = {{budget}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{32}}, author = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, } @ARTICLE{17-6, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{8}}, title = {{Een rol voor {\TeX} in het 3de millennium}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{43}}, author = {{Michel Goossens}}, names = {{Michel Goossens}}, } @ARTICLE{17-7, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{9-10}}, title = {{(Cyr)TuG, and some more}}, keywords = {{CyrTUG,TUG conference,Dubna}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{64}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan, Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan, Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{Report of TUG meeting in Dubna, Russia.}}} @ARTICLE{17-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{11-16}}, title = {{De spelling van het lot}}, keywords = {{new dutch,dutch spelling,spell checker,Groene Boekje}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{76}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Het SPELLINGBESLUIT gepubliceerd in Staatsblad 394 (Besluit van 19 juni 1996, houdende voorschriften omtrent de schrijfwijze van de Nederlandse taal) heeft niet alleen gezorgd voor veel gekrakeel tussen neerlandici, maar het vormde ook een buitenkans voor uitgeverijen van werken als HET GROENE BOEKJE (binnen zes maanden 500.000 verkochte exemplaren). Kleinere ondernemingen brachten floppies op de markt met woordenlijsten en algoritmen. Intussen sloeg een groepje mensen (bestaande uit -- in alfabetische volgorde -- Erick Branderhorst, Erik Frambach, Frans Goddijn, Hans Hagen, Gerard van Nes, Piet Tutelaers, Jacoline van Weelden en Peter van Zeeland, en terzijde gestaan door Hans Linders) de handen ineen om te komen tot een vrij beschikbare, zo correct mogelijke Nederlandse woordenlijst.}}} @ARTICLE{17-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{17-22}}, title = {{Heeft {\TeX} nog toekomst?}}, keywords = {{future,{\TeX} reflection}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{82}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{This articles is meant as a starting point for further discussion on the future of {\TeX}. The author wrote this expose after a discussion in the NTG board concerning the future of {\TeX} and the NTG.}}} @ARTICLE{17-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{23-31}}, title = {{Do journals honor {\LaTeX} submissions?}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},journals,submissions,academic}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{117}}, author = {{Gabriel Valiente Feruglio}}, names = {{Gabriel Valiente Feruglio}}, abstract = {{The survival of {\LaTeX} in the academic world will depend on {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} evolving towards changing publishing practices, but also on publishers actually accepting {\LaTeX} submissions. Much has been said about the former, with a recent feature number of TUGboat addressing the subject of electronic publishing. When it comes to the latter issue, however, it is often taken for granted that scientific journals honor {\LaTeX} submissions. An extensive research over the Internet reveals that, on the contrary, at the turn of the century many journals still regret to accept {\LaTeX} submissions, sometimes preferring RTF or even bare ASCII sources to {\TeX} or {\LaTeX}. This note discusses some of the issues behind this situation and compiles all journals known to the au-thor that accept electronic submission of {\LaTeX} articles in source form, thereby complementing the {\TeX} counterpart.}}} @ARTICLE{17-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{32-33}}, title = {{Introduction to ``{\TeX} Unbound: {\LaTeX} \& {\TeX} Strategies, Fonts, Graphics, and More''}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{37}}, author = {{Alan Hoenig}}, names = {{Alan Hoenig}}, } @ARTICLE{17-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{34-40}}, title = {{Virtual Fonts, Virtuous Fonts}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{131}}, author = {{Alan Hoenig}}, names = {{Alan Hoenig}}, abstract = {{Virtual fonts allow us to use all digital fonts with {\TeX}, even non-{\TeX} ones, and do much more for us. What are virtual fonts? Several projects grant us necessary experience with them. This document comprises somewhat less than half of the similarly named chapter which will appear in the book {\TeX} Unbound: {\LaTeX} and {\TeX} Strategies for Fonts, Graphics, and More, by Alan Hoenig, to be published in early 1997 by Oxford University Press. This excerpt is simplified so that it may be printed using the standard suite of {\TeX} fonts; the original depends heavily on PostScript fonts and the author's style file for its typesetting. Consequently, some displays could not be included. For any questions or comments, please contact the author at ajhjj@cunyvm.cuny.edu.}}} @ARTICLE{17-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{41-45}}, title = {{Detailed Contents for ``{\TeX} Unbound: {\LaTeX} \& {\TeX} Strategies, Fonts, Graphics, and More''}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{62}}, author = {{Alan Hoenig}}, names = {{Alan Hoenig}}, abstract = {{This book will be published by Oxford University Press in early 1997. Contact the author at ajhjj@cunyvm.cuny.edu for further information.}}} @ARTICLE{17-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{46-51}}, title = {{A {\LaTeX} tour, part 1: the base distribution}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},base distribution,documentation,guide}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{75}}, author = {{David Carlisle}}, names = {{David Carlisle}}, abstract = {{In this article I hope to give a `guided tour' around the files that make up the basic {\LaTeX} distribution. Subsequent articles in this mini-series will cover other packages by the {\LaTeX} development team, and also some of the main contributed packages.}}} @ARTICLE{17-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{52-56}}, title = {{A {\LaTeX} tour, part 2: the Tools and Graphics distribution}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},tools package distribution,documentation,guide}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{98}}, author = {{David Carlisle}}, names = {{David Carlisle}}, abstract = {{In the previous article in this series I started by giving a description of the files in the `base' {\LaTeX} distribution. In part 2, I shall cover the `tools' and `graphics' distributions. These are distributed in the tools and graphics subdirectories of the CTAN directory macros/{\LaTeX}/packages. Although these files are not part of the min-imal base distribution they should normally be included in the {\LaTeX} installation at any site. The {\LaTeX} book assumes that at least the graphics distribution is installed.}}} @ARTICLE{17-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{57-64}}, title = {{FRISTI}}, keywords = {{small,lists,directory,calendar,key fob,credit card,stuffing}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{165}}, author = {{Herman Haverkort}}, names = {{Herman Haverkort}}, abstract = {{This article gives an impression of my way of designing and typesetting very small telephone and address lists, birthday calendars etc. Design considerations and typesetting tricks are presented. The latter include macros which define the sheets (from A4 to credit card and even key fob size), macros to process data records (typically specified in a separate file) in various ways, and macros to stuff and stow data in very limited space.}}} @ARTICLE{17-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{65-71}}, title = {{PMGRAPH.STY: some useful macros which extends the {\LaTeX} picture environment}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{143}}, author = {{Alexander Berdnikov, Olga Grineva}}, names = {{Alexander Berdnikov, Olga Grineva}}, } @ARTICLE{17-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{72-114}}, title = {{Using EPS Graphics in {\LaTeX}2e Documents}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{277}}, author = {{Keith Reckdahl}}, names = {{Keith Reckdahl}}, abstract = {{This document explains how to use Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files in {\LaTeX}2e documents. The graphics and graphicx packages provide commands which insert, scale, and rotate EPS graphics.}}} @ARTICLE{17-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{115-121}}, title = {{Star{\TeX} -- a {\TeX} for beginners}}, keywords = {{{\TeX} format,novice {\TeX},robust {\TeX},error recovery in {\TeX},{\TeX} with SGML notation}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{107}}, author = {{Dag Langmyhr}}, names = {{Dag Langmyhr}}, abstract = {{This article describes Star{\TeX}, a new {\TeX} format for students writing their first report and other novice users. Its aim is to provide a simpler and more robust tool for users with no previous knowledge of {\TeX} and {\LaTeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{17-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{122-125}}, title = {{Paradigms: Loops}}, keywords = {{BLUe format,loops,plain {\TeX},tail recursion}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{79}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The implementation of loops in plain {\TeX} is surveyed. Van der Goot's loop is a remarkable straight implementation of tail recursion. Nesting of loops and the pitfalls in there are discussed. The use of hidden counters and the flip-flop traversal are given.}}} @ARTICLE{17-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{126-131}}, title = {{Paradigms: Searching}}, keywords = {{BLUe format,databases,pattern recognition,plain {\TeX},tree searching,selective loading}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{58}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Various ways of searching in plain {\TeX} are surveyed. Its use in BLUe's format for selective loading of macros, addresses, pictures, formats and tools is discussed. Interactively searching through a binary tree in dialogue with {\TeX} is also given.}}} @ARTICLE{17-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{132-136}}, title = {{Paradigms: Sorting}}, keywords = {{BLUe format,heap sort,index preparation,plain {\TeX},quick sort}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{77}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Various ways of sorting in plain {\TeX} are surveyed. Macros for linear sorting (in the mouth), quick sort and heap sort are given. The use for sorting index reminders for indexing on-the-fly is touched upon.}}} @ARTICLE{17-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{137-150}}, title = {{Paradigms: Just a little bit of PostScript}}, keywords = {{declarative program,EPS,Escher,graphics,imperative code,{\LaTeX},Koch island,Malevich,math graphs,METAFONT,MFtoEPS,Mondrian,PostScript,projection,reverse video,ROEX,Schroefer,sideways tables,suprematism,text along curved paths,tiling}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{161}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{It is all about creating EPS -- with graphics -- to be merged with (La){\TeX} scripts. The emphasis is on creating raw PostScript for simple symmetrical pictures. Asides, like incorporating accurate graphs of math functions, typesetting text along curved paths, or tables set sideways, next to reverse video, clipping and tiling have been addressed. A poor man's MFtoEPS approach is touched upon: (declarative) METAFONT into (imperative) PostScript.}}} @ARTICLE{17-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{151-156}}, title = {{Visual Debugging in {\TeX}: a short introduction}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{168}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, } @ARTICLE{17-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{157-174}}, title = {{Visual Debugging in {\TeX}: how things are done}}, keywords = {{{Con\TeX t},visual debugging,debugging,boxes,glue,penalties,kerns,fills}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{119}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{By redefining some {\TeX} primitives, one can get an impression of what {\TeX} and macros are doing behind the screens. This article visualizes some rather common but often unnoticed {\TeX} features. The visual debugger described here is part of {Con\TeX t}, but can be used in plain {\TeX} and other macro packages as well.}}} @ARTICLE{17-26, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{175}}, title = {{Where to find {Con\TeX t}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1996}}, volume = {{17}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{6}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, } @BOOK{NTG-pr, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-36}}, title = {{NTG's Public Relation Set}}, keywords = {{NTG,introduction}}, year = {{1996}}, series = {{MAPS Special Editions}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{633}}, editor = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, abstract = {{Informatie voor ge{\"\i}nteresseerden in {\TeX} \& de NTG. Introductie over {\TeX} met vele voorbeelden.}}} @BOOK{maps18, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-175}}, title = {{MAPS 97.1}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, editor = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{18-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-2}}, title = {{Verslag Bijeenkomst}}, keywords = {{report,meeting,members meeting}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{30}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Opening, Notulen, Ingekomen stukken en mededelingen, bestuursmutaties, subsidieaanvraag, begroting 1997, MAPS zaken, Activiteiten, Lustrumcommissie, Werkgroepen}}} @ARTICLE{18-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{3-4}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1997/1)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{27}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, } @ARTICLE{18-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{5}}, title = {{Redactioneel (1997/1)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{16}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, } @ARTICLE{18-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{6-7}}, title = {{Het weten waard}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{36}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{18-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{8-9}}, title = {{Financieel verslag 1996}}, keywords = {{financial report}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{14}}, author = {{Erik Frambach, Wybo Dekker}}, names = {{Erik Frambach, Wybo Dekker}}, } @ARTICLE{18-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{10-12}}, title = {{Jaarverslag NTG 1996}}, keywords = {{report NTG}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{37}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{18-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-14}}, title = {{{\TeX} Users Group, gisteren, vandaag en morgen}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{33}}, author = {{Michel Goossens}}, names = {{Michel Goossens}}, } @ARTICLE{18-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{15-17}}, title = {{Bericht van FGBBS -- Voorjaar 1997}}, keywords = {{FGBBS,report}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{34}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Hoewel ``de loop eruit is'' in de \texttt{BBS} winkelstraten, houdt \texttt{FGBBS} stand als het rustige knopenwinkeltje dat met enige regelmaat wordt bezocht door een kleine maar trouwe klantenkring uit de wijde omgeving.}}} @ARTICLE{18-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{18}}, title = {{WG: Educatie -- een overzicht en oproep}}, keywords = {{working group,education}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{12}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Een overzicht van de activiteiten binnen en buiten de WG wordt gegeven, met daarnaast een suggestie.}}} @ARTICLE{18-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{19}}, title = {{WG: {\TeX} \& SGML}}, keywords = {{working group,SGML}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{12}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{Een korte introductie van de werkgroep SGML en een oproep voor geinteresseerde leden}}} @ARTICLE{18-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{21-23}}, title = {{De nieuwe NTG-WWW pagina's}}, keywords = {{NTG,internet,WWW}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{88}}, author = {{Erik Frambach, Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Erik Frambach, Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{Sinds kort zijn de WWW-pagina's van de NTG (\texttt{http://WWW.ntg.nl}) geheel vernieuwd. Dit artikel geeft een overzicht van de idee\"en achter de nieuwe opzet en uitvoering.}}} @ARTICLE{18-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{25-36}}, title = {{Gezeefd uit de {\TeX}-NL discussielijst (1997)}}, keywords = {{TEX-NL,discussionlist,tips,hints,beginner,help,stylefiles}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{95}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{In 1993 publiceerde Philippe Vanoverbeke in de MAPS tweemaal een selectie van berichten uit de {\TeX}-NL lijst. Nu, een poosje later, wordt de draad weer opgepakt. Een aantal oplossingen, hints en gouden tips over onderwerpen waarvan je weleens denkt: ``hoe zat dat ook alweer?'' Deze informatie is, samen met nog veel meer van dergelijke waardevolle berichten uit {\TeX}-NL, ook na te lezen op FGBBS in het berichtengebied FGBBS.ARCHIVE. Opvallend is dat in bijna alle gevallen het snelste en definitieve antwoord wordt gegeven door Piet van Oostrum (piet@cs.ruu.nl, http://WWW.cs.ruu.nl/~piet), zonder wie {\TeX}-NL niet het zeer nuttige en snelle medium zou zijn dat het nu is. OOSTRUM-NL zou ook een goeie naam zijn.}}} @ARTICLE{18-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{37-39}}, title = {{Conversie van Bib{\TeX} naar HTML, {\TeX} en {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{Bib{\TeX},Perl,HTML,conversion}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{37}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{Bib{\TeX}-bibliografie\"en kunnen met behulp van een Perl-script vertaald worden naar HTML. Een variant op dat script levert een compleet {\LaTeX}-bestand. Nog een andere variant levert een plain {\TeX}-bestand dat naar believen bijgeschaafd kan worden. Als gereedschap is enkel Perl en (La){\TeX} nodig.}}} @ARTICLE{18-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{41-44}}, title = {{Het invoeren en afdrukken van de Latin-1 Characterset}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{56}}, author = {{Ton Biegstraaten}}, names = {{Ton Biegstraaten}}, abstract = {{Ten behoeve van een collegedictaat is een tabel nodig met de Latin-1 of iso-8859-1 characterset. Dit artikel behandelt het invoeren en afdrukken van deze characterset met behulp van {\LaTeX}2e.}}} @ARTICLE{18-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{45-52}}, title = {{SGML entities in (La){\TeX}: \texttt{sgmlent.sty}}}, keywords = {{SGML entities,SGML conversion,SGML}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{162}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{This package provides an easy-to-use interface to the SGML character entity sets (ISO 8879, Annex D). All entity sets defined in the Annex are supported, but there are still some minor problems.}}} @ARTICLE{18-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{53-60}}, title = {{The {\LaTeX} Graphics Companion}}, keywords = {{abstract,table of contents,preface,{\LaTeX}}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{55}}, author = {{Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz, Frank Mittelbach}}, names = {{Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz, Frank Mittelbach}}, abstract = {{This handy reference describes techniques and tricks needed to illustrate {\LaTeX} documents, and answers common user questions about graphics and PostScript fonts. It provides the first full description of the standard {\LaTeX} color and graphics packages, and shows how you can combine {\TeX} and PostScript capabilities to produce beautifully illustrated pages. Following the successful format of \emph{The {\LaTeX} Companion}, this new book will be an invaluable {\LaTeX} resource for incorporating pictures into text.}}} @ARTICLE{18-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{61-63}}, title = {{Loading Pic{\TeX} without problems}}, keywords = {{PIC{\TeX},PPCH{\TeX}}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{27}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{When using ppch{\TeX} in {\LaTeX}, one can run out of dimension registers. This article describes a loading mechanism that take care of proper loading of PIC{\TeX}, that is, by using as few dimensions as possible.}}} @ARTICLE{18-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{65-67}}, title = {{pdf{\TeX}, een eerste indruk}}, keywords = {{PDF,pdf{\TeX},web2c}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{37}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{Currently a new extension of {\TeX} is under development. This web2c based extension pdf{\TeX} not only produces DVI output, but alternatively generates PDF code. Functionality as well as new primitives are described.}}} @ARTICLE{18-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{69}}, title = {{Even voorstellen: de EPDA}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{17}}, author = {{Ton Otten}}, names = {{Ton Otten}}, } @ARTICLE{18-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{71-82}}, title = {{Puzzling Graphics in METAPOST}}, keywords = {{METAPOST,puzzles,graphics}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{243}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{METAPOST can be used for more than math oriented graphics. This article describes some macros for drawing arbitrary jigsaw puzzles and shifting puzzles. METAPOST can be fun!}}} @ARTICLE{18-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{83-85}}, title = {{Scans and bitmaps in {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{scan,image,bitmap,resolution,halftone,PostScript}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{240}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{Guidelines are given for working with scans and bitmaps, with the emphasis on PostScript printing from {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{18-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{87-91}}, title = {{Using fonts in METAPOST -- one way of forcing {\TeX} to include the right fonts}}, keywords = {{METAPOST,fonts in METAPOST,{Con\TeX t}}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{76}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{METAPOST graphics can contain {\TeX} produced text. Unfortunately, when including such graphics in {\TeX} documents, only DVIPS knows how to include the right glyphs. This articles describes a method (and macros) to handle glyph inclusion independant of DVI drivers. The {Con\TeX t} module described here can be used in other macro packages as well. (A later version of this module implements a more efficient mechanism as well as some additional functionality.)}}} @ARTICLE{18-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{93-98}}, title = {{Stars around 1 -- PostScript straightaway}}, keywords = {{EPS,fractal,intersection,Koch island,METAFONT,METAPOST,MFtoEPS,outline,PostScript,ROEX,star,tiling}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{75}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Drawing the outline of stars is discussed. A METAFONT/Post and a PostScript program are included, next to a Colombus' egg PostScript solution. The appendices contain compositions of stars and a few versions of a PostScript operator to calculate the intersection point of two lines determined by four points.}}} @ARTICLE{18-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{99-102}}, title = {{Stars around 2 -- what a little math can do}}, keywords = {{analytic geometry,clipping,intersection,linear equations,logos,METAPOST,METAFONT,MFtoEPS,outline,PostScript,ROEX,tangent}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{48}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The problems as treated by Jackowski in his lecture at NTG's 1996 fall meeting: a tangent to a circle, intersection of circles, V-like logo, and (circular) clipping of waves, are provided with alternative solutions, along with straightaway PostScript codes.}}} @ARTICLE{18-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{103-104}}, title = {{Bacho{\TeX} 97 -- {\TeX} from inside}}, keywords = {{Bacho{\TeX},GUST,Poland}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{54}}, author = {{Erik Frambach, Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Erik Frambach, Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A report of GUST's 5th conference in Bachotek, Poland.}}} @ARTICLE{18-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{105-113}}, title = {{Een greep uit de fontverzameling van {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{1394}}, author = {{Ton Biegstraaten}}, names = {{Ton Biegstraaten}}, abstract = {{De verzameling fonts die beschikbaar is binnen {\TeX} is zeer omvangrijk. In dit artikel wordt een subjectieve poging gedaan hier iets van te laten zien.}}} @ARTICLE{18-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{115-116}}, title = {{{\TeX}, BLUes, and Jazz -- a search for values}}, keywords = {{BLUe,databases,plain {\TeX}}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{26}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{How to use {\TeX} for a database oriented application is shown by the example of a collection of Jazz CDs. The request was to provide (part) of the title of a tune and to let {\TeX} response with all the CDs which contain that tune. Only a few lines of code was all that was needed to fulfill the purpose. The example might serve as a user-oriented stepping stone for understanding how in BLUe's format {\TeX} as database engine has been used.}}} @ARTICLE{18-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{117-123}}, title = {{Gegevensverwerking met da{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{databases,data integrity,da{\TeX}}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{72}}, author = {{Andries Lenstra, Ruud Koning}}, names = {{Andries Lenstra, Ruud Koning}}, abstract = {{De auteurs geven een inleiding in da{\TeX}. Dat is een verzameling macro's waarmee gegevens eenvoudig kunnen worden verwerkt in een {\TeX} of {\LaTeX} file. Twee voorbeelden illustreren de grote mogelijkheden van deze macro's. Een uitgebreide handleiding en de macro's zelf staan op \texttt{WWW.xs4all.nl/~rhkoning}.}}} @ARTICLE{18-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{125-130}}, title = {{Adobe Supra: Adobe's High-Performance Raster Image Processor (RIP) Architecture for Print-on-Demand Systems}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{82}}, author = {{Wiegert Tierie}}, names = {{Wiegert Tierie}}, } @ARTICLE{18-30, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{131-144}}, title = {{Computergestuurd Zetten of Electronisch publiceren? Nieuwe trends in wetenschappelijk publiceren}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{172}}, author = {{Philip Taylor}}, names = {{Philip Taylor}}, abstract = {{Abstract in het pools, tekst vertaald uit het engels door Taco Hoekwater}}} @ARTICLE{18-31, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{145-150}}, title = {{lyx: een front-end voor {\LaTeX} of een textprocessor?}}, keywords = {{LyX,review,WYSIWYG,front-end}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{121}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{Dit artikel is een recentie van het programma LyX. Lyx is een programma voor X windows dat dient als (bijna-)WYSIWYG schil bovenop {\LaTeX}. De huidige stabiele beta-versie, die hier dan ook besproken wordt, is versie 0.10.7. Het programma wordt geschreven door een aantal auteurs onder `leiding' van Matthias Ettrich (\texttt{ettrich@informatik.uni-tuebingen.de}).}}} @ARTICLE{18-32, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{151-154}}, title = {{kdvi: een verbeterde xdvi}}, keywords = {{DVI previewer,previewer,X,interface}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{129}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{kdvi is een aangepaste versie van xdvi, een DVI previewer voor het X Window Systeem. De belangrijkste verandering is het gebruik van een `echte' grafische interface ter vervanging van de nogal primitieve widgets van xdvi. kdvi is \emph{alpha} software, de huidige versie is 0.2. De auteur is Markku Hihnala (\texttt{mah@ee.oulu.fi}).}}} @ARTICLE{18-33, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{155-159}}, title = {{DVIPS manual -- good old portability, and some more}}, keywords = {{aligning figures,BLUe format,captions,DVI,EPS,figures,minimal markup,overprinting,portability,PostScript}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{61}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Portable manuals should be written and marked up in this way. Just a few macros to take care of the formatting. The manual can be easily personalized. The dvips manual has been made available as a BLUe report with an index -- based on IR-s by Rokicki -- and a ToC. Both are welcome when using the manual. Some experience in using dvips under UNIX is also reported: overprinting a picture, adding a caption, and aligning pictures. A pitfall in using psfig is mentioned as well.}}} @ARTICLE{18-34, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{161-166}}, title = {{How to handle compound and bounded words}}, keywords = {{compound words,hyphenation,{Con\TeX t},boundary characters}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{44}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{The dutch language permits words to be combined in many ways. To permit such compound words to be hyphenated properly, a versatile mechanism is presented, that handles all kind of compound and boundary situations. Although part of {Con\TeX t}, this module can be used in other packages as well.}}} @ARTICLE{18-35, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{167-170}}, title = {{Een moderne toren van Babel}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{61}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, abstract = {{In deze voordracht zal ik kort aandacht besteden aan `wat is {\TeX}', `wat is {\LaTeX}'. Hierbij komt ook het concept van `structuur markup' aan de orde. Vervolgens zal ik ingaan op de geschiedenis van het babel pakket. Aan de hand van een aantal voorbeelden zal ik toelichten welke problematiek zich voordoet bij het op een correcte wijze vormgeven van documenten waarin meerdere talen worden gebruikt.}}} @ARTICLE{18-36, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{171-174}}, title = {{Stretching the limits of Babel, an Ever Growing Package?}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{43}}, author = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, } @ARTICLE{18-37, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{175-190}}, title = {{NTG Ledeninformatie}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{18}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{72}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @BOOK{maps19, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-175}}, title = {{MAPS 97.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, editor = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{19-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-3}}, title = {{Verslag 19de NTG Bijeenkomst}}, keywords = {{report,meeting,members meeting}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{39}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Opening, Notulen, Ingekomen stukken en mededelingen, ledenvergadering}}} @ARTICLE{19-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{4}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1997/2)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{59}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, } @ARTICLE{19-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{5}}, title = {{Redactioneel (1997/2)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{14}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, } @ARTICLE{19-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{6-7}}, title = {{Het weten waard}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{31}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{19-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{8}}, title = {{Begroting NTG 1998}}, keywords = {{budget}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{13}}, author = {{Wybo Dekker}}, names = {{Wybo Dekker}}, } @ARTICLE{19-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{9}}, title = {{Ontwerpwedstrijd}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{25}}, author = {{NTG bestuur}}, names = {{NTG bestuur}}, } @ARTICLE{19-7, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{10-11}}, title = {{4all{\TeX} versie 4}}, keywords = {{4{\TeX},4all{\TeX},em{\TeX},plug \& play,CDROM}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{38}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{De vierde editie van de 4all{\TeX} cdroms komt eraan. Dit artikel beschrijft wat er zoal nieuw is in deze editie.}}} @ARTICLE{19-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{12}}, title = {{Het herontwerp van de MAPS}}, keywords = {{MAPS,paper format,fontkeuze,multi-columns,layout}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{15}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{Toelichting bij de nieuwe vormgeving van de MAPS: papierformaat, font keuze, aanpassingen voor twee-kolomsopmaak.}}} @ARTICLE{19-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-18}}, title = {{De macros uit de nieuwe MAPS class}}, keywords = {{MAPS class file,macro design,layout}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{54}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{Dit artikel beschrijft de macros die gebruikt worden in de nieuwe maps class file. De nadruk ligt op de macros die proberen een stramien te ondersteunen.}}} @ARTICLE{19-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{19-27}}, title = {{Book Design for {\TeX} Users -- Part 1: Theory}}, keywords = {{design,typography,layout}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{104}}, author = {{Philip Taylor}}, names = {{Philip Taylor}}, abstract = {{Book design cannot be taught; it can only be learned, preferably by critical study of as many books as possible. Of all the elements which make up a book, white space is frequently the least considered and the most important. \emph{Avant garde} designs are compared and contrasted with more conservative and traditional approaches. Three key elements: \emph{uniformity}, \emph{information} and \emph{structure} are identified, and `good design practice' discussed in terms of each of these.}}} @ARTICLE{19-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{28-38}}, title = {{Book Design for {\TeX} Users -- Part 2: Practice}}, keywords = {{design,typography,layout}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{121}}, author = {{Philip Taylor}}, names = {{Philip Taylor}}, abstract = {{In the predecessor to this paper, three fundamental concepts of \emph{uniformity}, \emph{information} and \emph{structure} were introduced, and general guidance given on each of them. In this paper, more practical advice is given, specifically in two areas: guidance on actual dimensions, proportions and layout; and guidance on implementing some of the ideas through the medium of the {\TeX} language. Finally, some difficult (and even insoluble) problems in layout are discussed.}}} @ARTICLE{19-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{39-67}}, title = {{Tiling in PostScript and METAFONT -- Escher's wink}}, keywords = {{Apollonius,computer art,Douat,Duerer,EPS,Escher,graphics,METAFONT,METAPOST,outline,Kepler,Mondrian,parquet,Penrose,PostScript,puzzles,Soddy,tiling,Truchet,turtle graphics,zero finding}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{819}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{Drawing tilings by computer is discussed. Examples are borrowed from literature. New are their included METAFONT and PostScript programs, with sometimes a new variation of a picture.}}} @ARTICLE{19-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{68-70}}, title = {{Toolbox (1997)}}, keywords = {{PostScript,installation,toolbox}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{44}}, author = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, abstract = {{Er lopen in de wereld zo veel {\TeX}-gebruikers rond, dat het zelden zal voorkomen dat een normale gebruiker de eerste is die een probleem tegen komt. Meestal zal dit probleem ook al door iemand anders zijn opgelost en vaak staat de oplossing op de 4all{\TeX}, {\TeX}live of een andere cd-rom. Indien daar niet te vinden is staat er vast wel een oplossing op ctan of \'e\'en of andere Internetsite. Het probleem zit hem niet in de beschikbaarheid, maar in het opsporen van de oplossing. Artikelen in maps zijn daarvoor natuurlijk een belangrijke informatiebron. Sommige oplossingen zijn echter zo eenvoudig dat er nooit een artikel aan gewijd zal worden. Over een draadstriptang valt nu eenmaal niet al te veel te vertellen. In Toolbox zal niet alleen de draadstriptang worden besproken, maar ook het gebruik van lucifers om het plastic van het einde van het snoer af te branden. Stuur ook informatie over uw favoriete tools naar mij op, zo kan Toolbox een belangrijke informatiebron worden over utilities, macro's en andere eenvoudige trucs voor de gewone {\TeX}-gebruiker. Deze keer is de spil van het verhaal PostScript.}}} @ARTICLE{19-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{71-72}}, title = {{TUG'97 conferentie}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,San Francisco}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{27}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{Een kort verslag van de conferentie van de {\TeX} Users Group 1997 in San Francisco, USA.}}} @ARTICLE{19-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{73-75}}, title = {{Installatie-handleidinkje voor `{\LaTeX} voor Windows 1.0'}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},Windows,systems,installation}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{32}}, author = {{Robbert Hardin}}, names = {{Robbert Hardin}}, abstract = {{Op verzoek van Frans Goddijn heeft FGBBS-user Robbert Hardin een verslag geschreven van de installatie van het pakket {\LaTeX} voor Windows (16 diskettes, ook op FGBBS te vinden).}}} @ARTICLE{19-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{76-78}}, title = {{{\LaTeX} \& Chinees}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},Chinese,CJK,fonts,PostScript,Big5}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{110}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{Met behulp van het {\LaTeX}-package `CJK' is het mogelijk om tekst te zetten in het Chinees, Japans en Koreaans. In dit artikel laat ik in het kort zien wat ervoor nodig is om Chinese tekst met {\LaTeX} -- Japans en Koreaans blijven buiten beschouwing. Het installeren van de benodigde software wordt behandeld, evenals het gebruik van dit systeem in de praktijk.}}} @ARTICLE{19-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{79-86}}, title = {{{\TeX} inside, insight, in sight: get priorities right}}, keywords = {{active list separators,greyboxes,hyphenation of accented words,minimal markup,partitioned matrices,two-part macros}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{98}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{It is argued that for using {\TeX} -- a multi-level tool -- {\TeX} inside knowledge should not be necessary for the layman, for production purposes. The `why, what and when,' especially at the grey level will be discussed. Necessary insight issues are enumerated.}}} @ARTICLE{19-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{87-96}}, title = {{Local Guide {\TeX}-installatie Fewec}}, keywords = {{local guide,{\LaTeX} installation,editor,Jed}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{86}}, author = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, abstract = {{Dit is de Local Guide van de {\LaTeX} installatie van de Faculteit der Economische Wetenschappen en Econometrie van de Vrije Universiteit te Amsterdam. De Local Guide is niet bedoeld als {\LaTeX}-handleiding, maar als aanvulling daarop. Er wordt een korte uitleg over {\LaTeX} gegeven, een aantal bijzonderheden van onze {\LaTeX}-installatie wordt genoemd en de gebruikte editor (Jed) wordt besproken. De Local Guide kan zeker worden uitgebreid. Eenieder die nieuw materiaal heeft kan dit aan mij doorsturen en ik zal zorgen dat het, zoveel mogelijk ongewijzigd, wordt opgenomen.}}} @ARTICLE{19-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{97-111}}, title = {{User manual for kluwer.cls}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX}2e,electronic submission,user manual,class file,Kluwer}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{209}}, author = {{Kluwer Academic Publishers}}, names = {{Kluwer Academic Publishers}}, abstract = {{This is the user manual for the kluwer.cls class file for the preparation of articles to be submitted to journals or spin-offs of journals published by Kluwer Academic Publishers. The kluwer.cls is a generic class, which allows us to have a simple conversion to different journal layouts. The kluwer.cls class file is similar to the \emph{article} class file of {\LaTeX}, but it has some extra fields in the preamble and some extended commands for the body text.}}} @ARTICLE{19-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{112-114}}, title = {{Quark Xpress: een vakantieliefde}}, keywords = {{Quark Xpress,manual}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{35}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Hoe prachtig ``ons {\TeX}'' ook is, in de wijde wereld daarbuiten is het onbekend. De meeste drukkers en grafische ontwerpers weten niet eens wat het is. Pas als je het magische woord ``Quark Xpress'' laat vallen, tel je voor hen mee. Afgelopen zomer kocht ik een manual van meer dan 600 pagina's en verslond dit in de vakantie. Wat heeft dat pakket dat wij niet hebben?}}} @ARTICLE{19-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{115-177}}, title = {{{Con\TeX t} voor beginners}}, keywords = {{{Con\TeX t} manual}}, year = {{1997}}, volume = {{19}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{2263}}, author = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}}, names = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}}, abstract = {{Hierna volgt een introductie op {Con\TeX t}. Deze handleiding is, net als {Con\TeX t}, beschikbaar in het Nederlands en Engels en binnenkort ook in het Duits. Dit is de eerste versie; op- en aanmerkingen zijn dan ook welkom.}}} @BOOK{maps20, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-348}}, title = {{MAPS 98.1}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, editor = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{20-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1-2}}, title = {{Verslag 20e bijeenkomst, 11 november 1997}}, keywords = {{report,members meeting}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{87}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, } @ARTICLE{20-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{3-4}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1998/1)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{136}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, } @ARTICLE{20-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{5}}, title = {{From the TUG President}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{75}}, author = {{Mimi Jett}}, names = {{Mimi Jett}}, } @ARTICLE{20-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{6}}, title = {{Redactioneel (1998/1)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{59}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}}, } @ARTICLE{20-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7-8}}, title = {{Het weten waard}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{138}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{20-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{9-10}}, title = {{Financieel verslag 1997}}, keywords = {{financial report}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{63}}, author = {{Wybo Dekker}}, names = {{Wybo Dekker}}, } @ARTICLE{20-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{11-14}}, title = {{Jaarverslag ntg 1997}}, keywords = {{report NTG}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{95}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, } @ARTICLE{20-8, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{15-16}}, title = {{De NTG en het Internet (1998/1)}}, keywords = {{discussionlist,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{105}}, author = {{Jules van Weerden, Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Jules van Weerden, Maarten Gelderman}}, } @ARTICLE{20-9, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{17-19}}, title = {{FGBBS op snelheid -- verslag van FGBBS}}, keywords = {{BBS,bulletin board,file requests,email,library}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{106}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, } @ARTICLE{20-10, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{20-24}}, title = {{10 jaar NTG -- wat vinden de leden}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,enquete}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{162}}, author = {{Hans Hagen, Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Hans Hagen, Maarten Gelderman}}, } @ARTICLE{20-11, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{25-26}}, title = {{Het nieuwe NTG logo}}, keywords = {{NTG logo,EPS}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{129}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, } @ARTICLE{20-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{en}}, pages = {{26}}, title = {{Why \expandafter is sometimes needed by common users too}}, keywords = {{\expandafter,macro language}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{93}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, } @ARTICLE{20-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{27-32}}, title = {{10 jaar NTG}}, keywords = {{NTG,{\TeX} user groups,lustrum}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{141}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{Een terugblik op tien jaar NTG, met een vooruitblik naar de komende jaren.}}} @ARTICLE{20-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{33-37}}, title = {{Euro{\TeX}'98 in Saint-Malo, France}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},conference,Saint-Malo}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{250}}, author = {{Erik Frambach, Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Erik Frambach, Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{This year's Euro{\TeX} conference was held in Saint-Malo. On behalf of the NTG ERik Frambach, Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater and Siep Kroonenberg represented the dutch {\TeX}-community. In this report they discuss the social and {\TeX}nical aspects of the conference.}}} @ARTICLE{20-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{en}}, pages = {{37/43}}, title = {{Expansion, what is that?}}, keywords = {{expansion,macro language}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{163}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, } @ARTICLE{20-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{38-43}}, title = {{Color in professional print production}}, keywords = {{color printing,color model,device-independent color,color conversion,color separation,PDF}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{1101}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{This paper takes a look at issues arising in color printing, such as color models, color conversion and color separation. Increasingly, it is feasible to perform these functions on existing PostScript files, independent of the authoring software. The PDF format plays a key role in this trend.}}} @ARTICLE{20-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{44-45}}, title = {{Microsoft buys {\TeX}, plans new products}}, keywords = {{MicroSoft,Knuth,joke}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{800}}, author = {{Richard Kinch}}, names = {{Richard Kinch}}, } @ARTICLE{20-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{46-64}}, title = {{Reprint Maps issue #1}}, keywords = {{MAPS reprint}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{876}}, author = {{Gerard van Nes}}, names = {{Gerard van Nes}}, abstract = {{This is a fascimile of the very first MAPS issue, originally published in 1988}}} @ARTICLE{20-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{65-71}}, title = {{Het zetten van wetenschappelijk werk: 1973 vs 1998 -- (Monotype vs {\TeX})}}, keywords = {{typesetting,monotype,traditional typesetting}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{263}}, author = {{Gerrit Oomen}}, names = {{Gerrit Oomen}}, } @ARTICLE{20-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{72-79}}, title = {{Typografische scanning}}, keywords = {{typography,dutch}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{360}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{Dit artikel geeft een beschouwing over ``Nederlandse'' typografie, aan de hand van een aantal scans van in Nederland gepubliceerde boeken en tijdschriften uit de afgelopen drie eeuwen. Het artikel laat een aantal traditionele typografische vormen zien, met toevoeging van wat commentaren over het gebruikte proces.}}} @ARTICLE{20-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{80-107}}, title = {{Vlakverdeling in {Con\TeX t}}}, keywords = {{{Con\TeX t},layout,grids,two-up,logos,arranging pages}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{379}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{This article is actually chapter 3 of the {Con\TeX t} reference manual, typeset in the MAPS layout. Attention will be paid to defining layout specific areas, rearranging pages, locating logos, typesetting on a grid and adding cutmarks.}}} @ARTICLE{20-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{108-116}}, title = {{Arab{\TeX} -- Typesetting Arabic with Vowels and Ligatures}}, keywords = {{Arab{\TeX},transliteration,arabic,Farsi,Urdu,Pashto}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{230}}, author = {{Klaus Lagally}}, names = {{Klaus Lagally}}, abstract = {{We present a {\TeX} macro package for generating the arabic writing from a standardized ASCII input notation. It can handle partial or full vocalization, and generates automatically most of the common ligatures. There is limited support for Farsi, Urdu, and Pashto. Arab{\TeX} is compatible with Plain {\TeX} and also most {\LaTeX} environments; arabic and other material can be mixed freely. For special purposes the standard transliteration can be additionally generated. Arab{\TeX} uses no preprocessor and thus should be compatible with any {\TeX} implementation that allows dynamic loading of additional macro files and fonts.}}} @ARTICLE{20-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{117-119}}, title = {{Dartele cijfers: poor man's oldstyle}}, keywords = {{oldstyle,mediaeval,digits,numbers,trucs,pstricks}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{71}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Erik Frambach vroeg zich af of het mogelijk zou zijn om met wat trucs de oldstyle cijfers te emuleren dij fijnproevers zo mooi vinden. En het kostte nog minder moeite dan hij had verwacht!}}} @ARTICLE{20-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{120-124}}, title = {{DVIview, a new previewer}}, keywords = {{DVIview,previewer,Windows,outline fonts}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{154}}, author = {{Gilbert van den Dobbelsteen}}, names = {{Gilbert van den Dobbelsteen}}, abstract = {{DVIview is a new viewer for the Windows platform. Key features: virtual fonts, rotated and colored text and performance. This article focuses on the development process and hilights some features of the software.}}} @ARTICLE{20-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{125-130}}, title = {{Toolbox (1998)}}, keywords = {{Bib{\TeX},bibliography,bibdb,bibedit,toolbox}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{190}}, author = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, abstract = {{Literatuurverwijzingen vormen deze keer de hoofdmoot van het verhaal.}}} @ARTICLE{20-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{131-137}}, title = {{A {\LaTeX} Tour, part 3: mfnfss, psnfss and babel}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},psnfss,mfnfss,Babel}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{170}}, author = {{David Carlisle}}, names = {{David Carlisle}}, } @ARTICLE{20-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{138-141}}, title = {{Conversie van any{\TeX} naar HTML met {\TeX}4ht}}, keywords = {{conversion,HTML,WWW,tex4ht}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{178}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{Gurari's {\TeX}4ht-programmatuur maakt het mogelijk om in {\TeX} geschreven teksten (plain {\TeX}, {\LaTeX} of wat dan ook) vrij eenvoudig te converteren naar HTML. Als voorbeeld nemen we de 4{\TeX}-handleiding die in {\LaTeX} is geschreven.}}} @ARTICLE{20-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{142-145}}, title = {{Visual {\TeX} 5.10 for MS-Windows}}, keywords = {{{\TeX} implementations,visual {\TeX},Windows,HTML}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{242}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{MicroPress' Visual {\TeX} is a complete {\TeX} implementation for MS-DOS and all flavors of MS-Windows. The Windows version is reviewed here. It supports several interesting features that go beyond standard {\TeX}, such as outline fonts and conversion to HTML.}}} @ARTICLE{20-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{146-149}}, title = {{Windvi User's Manual}}, keywords = {{DVI previewer,windvi,manual}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{141}}, author = {{Fabrice Popineau}}, names = {{Fabrice Popineau}}, abstract = {{This article is an adaptation of the HTML file that comes with the current (0.40) version of windvi}}} @ARTICLE{20-30, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{150-209}}, title = {{PPCH{\TeX} -- a macropackage for typesetting chemical structure formulas with {\TeX} -- release 2}}, keywords = {{PPCH{\TeX},chemical formulas,graphics,manual}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{555}}, author = {{Ton Otten}}, names = {{Ton Otten}}, abstract = {{A few years ago PPCH{\TeX} was introduced. This generic macro package can be used to typeset chemical structure formulas. Currently the NTG supports a dedicated mailing list, to which quite some users subscribed. Here we present the long awaited for english update of the manual. The dutch and german manuals were already available for about a year and can be uploaded from the NTG server.}}} @ARTICLE{20-31, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{210-213}}, title = {{The DJGPP port of web2c}}, keywords = {{web2c,{\TeX} implementations,MS-DOS,djgpp}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{120}}, author = {{Gilbert van den Dobbelsteen}}, names = {{Gilbert van den Dobbelsteen}}, abstract = {{Web2c is getting popular and popular. Why? Because it is widespread. I'll discuss some of the aspects of the port to the MS-DOS environment. I used the variant on the 4all{\TeX}4 CD-ROM.}}} @ARTICLE{20-32, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{214-232}}, title = {{Gezeefd uit de TEX-NL discussielijst (1998)}}, keywords = {{TEX-NL,registered,guru,tips,hints,hack,bugs}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{223}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Dit is het vierde deel uit een serie die in 1993 door Philippe Vanoverbeke in de MAPS is gestart. Philippe maakte een selectie van berichten uit de TEX-NL lijst. Een aantal oplossingen, hints en gouden tips over onderwerpen waarvan je weleens denkt: ``hoe zat dat ook alweer?'' In de MAPS van voorjaar 1997 stond deel 3. Voor deze aflevering is een aantal berichten gezeefd uit TEX-NL van maart 1997 tot maart 1998. Tenzij anders is vermeld, zijn de onderstaande antwoorden van Piet van Oostrum. Omdat het wat bewerkelijk is om sommige trucs over te tikken, staat dit artikel ook op FGBBS.}}} @ARTICLE{20-33, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{233-234}}, title = {{Bacho{\TeX}'98 -- TUG at hand}}, keywords = {{Bacho{\TeX},GUST,Poland}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{81}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A report on GUST's sixth conference in Bachotek, Poland}}} @ARTICLE{20-34, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{235-237}}, title = {{BLUe's OTR for notes: back-to-the-roots}}, keywords = {{BLUe,manmac,output routine,plain {\TeX},preprints}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{99}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The back-to-the-roots OTR for BLUE's notes is discussed. It consists of Plain {\TeX}'s OTR for 1-column and the compatible extension as given in the {\TeX}book for 2-columns. Only the pagebody differs: 2-columns instead of 1-column. This replacement is aimed at facilitating a personalized preprint OTR, such that BLUe can easily adapt it. The modified \texttt{blue.tex} will be distributed by CTAN, and NTG's 4All{\TeX} CD-ROM.}}} @ARTICLE{20-35, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{238-242}}, title = {{The Oldenburg e{\TeX}/{\LaTeX}3/{Con\TeX t} meeting}}, keywords = {{e-{\TeX},{\LaTeX}3,{Con\TeX t},meeting}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{169}}, author = {{David Carlisle}}, names = {{David Carlisle}}, } @ARTICLE{20-36, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{243-246}}, title = {{Summary of math font-related activities at Euro{\TeX} '98}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},math fonts,bof}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{95}}, author = {{Barbara Beeton, Thierry Bouche, Taco Hoekwater, Patrick Ion, J\"org Knappen, Chris Rowley, Ulrik Vieth}}, names = {{Barbara Beeton, Thierry Bouche, Taco Hoekwater, Patrick Ion, J\"org Knappen, Chris Rowley, Ulrik Vieth}}, } @ARTICLE{20-37, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{247}}, title = {{Summary of indexing-related activities at Euro{\TeX} '98}}, keywords = {{xindy,Euro{\TeX},bof}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{94}}, author = {{Roger Kehr}}, names = {{Roger Kehr}}, abstract = {{This is an adaptation of the ascii file posted to the xindy newsgroup by Roger Kehr in the week following Euro{\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{20-38, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{248-263}}, title = {{The e-{\TeX} manual, version 2, februari 1998}}, keywords = {{e-{\TeX}}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{221}}, author = {{NTS team, Peter Breitenlohner}}, names = {{NTS team, Peter Breitenlohner}}, abstract = {{The preparation of this report was supported in part by DANTE, Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung {\TeX} e.V. `{\TeX}' is a trademark of the American Mathematical Society.}}} @ARTICLE{20-39, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{264-275}}, title = {{Generating Type 1 fonts from METAFONT Sources}}, keywords = {{METAFONT,PostScript,Type 1 fonts,conversion,metafog}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{657}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{This article makes a comparison between bitmapped and vector fonts, and presents some of the problems I encountered when I tried to convert METAFONT sources into PostScript Type 1 fonts.}}} @ARTICLE{20-40, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{276}}, title = {{Vergelijking van SGML en XML}}, keywords = {{SGML,XML,comparison}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{78}}, author = {{Simon Pepping}}, names = {{Simon Pepping}}, abstract = {{Dit is een inleiding op de volgende bijlage}}} @ARTICLE{20-41, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{277-279}}, title = {{Comparison of SGML and XML}}, keywords = {{SGML,XML,comparison}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{107}}, author = {{James Clark}}, names = {{James Clark}}, abstract = {{This document provides a detailed comparison of SGML (ISO 8879) and XML.}}} @ARTICLE{20-42, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{280-285}}, title = {{Comparing {Con\TeX t} and {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{{Con\TeX t},{\LaTeX},comparison,copyright,size,speed,functionality}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{155}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{Some aspects of {Con\TeX t} and {\LaTeX} are compared: the political decisions, the offered functionality, size of the system, and relative speed.}}} @ARTICLE{20-43, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{286-289}}, title = {{Pretty printing {\TeX} METAPOST, Perl and JavaScript}}, keywords = {{verbatim,METAPOST,Perl,JavaScript,{Con\TeX t}}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{105}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{Although for real pretty printing of sources one has to use CWEB like environments, {\TeX} can als do a pretty job rather well. The {Con\TeX t} verbatim environment has pretty printing built in. One can either use color or fonts. The latter is used in the MAPS, the former in this article.}}} @ARTICLE{20-44, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{290-296}}, title = {{The Calculator Demo -- Integrating {\TeX}, METAPOST, JavaScript and PDF}}, keywords = {{METAPOST,JavaScript,PDF,{Con\TeX t},pdf{\TeX}}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{201}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{Due to it's open character, {\TeX} can act as an authoring tool. This article demonstrates that by integrating {\TeX}, METAPOST, JavaScript and PDF, one can build pretty advanced documents. More and more documents will get the characteristics of programs, and {\TeX} will be our main tool for producing them. The example described here can be produced with pdf{\TeX} as well as traditional {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{20-45, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{297-298}}, title = {{Contending with Office suites}}, keywords = {{Windows,suites,wordprocessors,graphics,export,import,OLE,frogs}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{85}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{The author is tried beyond endurance by current Office software.}}} @ARTICLE{20-46, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{299-301}}, title = {{4{\TeX}5.0: TDS, Web2c, and Windows 95/NT}}, keywords = {{4{\TeX},Windows,beta preview}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{156}}, author = {{Wietse Dol}}, names = {{Wietse Dol}}, } @ARTICLE{20-47, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{302-304}}, title = {{Perl and {\TeX} a simple application}}, keywords = {{Perl,{\TeX},application}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{126}}, author = {{Gilbert van den Dobbelsteen}}, names = {{Gilbert van den Dobbelsteen}}, abstract = {{A simple application where perl is used to extract data from log-files and create output using {\TeX}. The perl-scripts in this article run under perl 4.036 and should also run under perl 5.}}} @ARTICLE{20-48, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{305-310}}, title = {{Some funny macro's}}, keywords = {{dropped caps,{Con\TeX t},first line treatment}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{110}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{Sometimes documents can be enhanced with special typography for the first character or lines of chapters. In this article I present some macros for dropped caps and first line treatment. Although more advanced solutions are possible, the examples show at least how things work. Users can derive their own macros from them.}}} @ARTICLE{20-49, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{311-347}}, title = {{{Con\TeX t} -- een handleiding}}, keywords = {{manual,beginner,{Con\TeX t}}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{20}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{1150}}, author = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}}, names = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}}, abstract = {{This is the second half of the {Con\TeX t} manual for beginners. Those who want an index and a quick reference guide, can dowload the complete manual from the NTG server. The layout is adapted to the MAPS layout.}}} @BOOK{maps21, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-84}}, title = {{MAPS 98.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Minutes \& Appendices}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, editor = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{21-1, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1}}, title = {{Verslag 21ste ledenvergadering NTG}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{62}}, author = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, abstract = {{Opening; Notulen 20ste bijeenkomst; Verslag van de secretaris; Verslag penningmeester en kascontrolecommissie; Bestuursverkiezingen; Erelidmaadschap.}}} @ARTICLE{21-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{2}}, title = {{Van de Voorzitter (1998/2)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{63}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, } @ARTICLE{21-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{3}}, title = {{Redactioneel (1998/2)}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{62}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg, Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg, Taco Hoekwater}}, } @ARTICLE{21-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{4}}, title = {{Het Weten Waard}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{122}}, author = {{anon.}}, names = {{anon.}}, } @ARTICLE{21-5, type = {{verslag}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{5-6}}, title = {{Verslag 21ste bijeenkomst NTG}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{87}}, author = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, } @ARTICLE{21-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7-8}}, title = {{De NTG en het Internet (1998/2)}}, keywords = {{discussionlist,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{109}}, author = {{Jules van Weerden}}, names = {{Jules van Weerden}}, abstract = {{De NTG is niet alleen met webpagina's op het Internet aanwezig, maar ook middels een aantal discussielijsten. In dit artikel wordt kort aangegeven wat een discussielijst is, hoe je je aan- en afmeldt en wat je te wachten staat na aanmelding. Tevens wordt een overzicht gegeven van de in Nederland aanwezige {\TeX}-gerelateerde lijsten.}}} @ARTICLE{21-7, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{9-12}}, title = {{{\TeX} User Groups around the world}}, keywords = {{{\TeX} user groups,addresses}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{316}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, } @ARTICLE{21-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{13-19}}, title = {{{\TeX} in 2003: Part I}}, keywords = {{{\TeX},future,proposals}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{176}}, author = {{NTG {\TeX} Future working group}}, names = {{NTG {\TeX} Future working group}}, abstract = {{Propositions and conjectures on the future of {\TeX}. This article was presented at TUG'98 in Torun, Poland.}}} @ARTICLE{21-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{20-27}}, title = {{{\TeX} in 2003: Part II}}, keywords = {{{\TeX},future,proposals,\special,standard}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{175}}, author = {{NTG {\TeX} Future working group}}, names = {{NTG {\TeX} Future working group}}, abstract = {{Proposal for a \texttt{\special} standard. This article was presented at TUG'98 in Torun, Poland.}}} @ARTICLE{21-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{28-30}}, title = {{Toolbox: let's keep things plain}}, keywords = {{plain {\TeX},{\LaTeX},integrating,toolbox}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{160}}, author = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, abstract = {{This Toolbox follows the eclectic approach that most readers will know from previous ones. Without aiming to give a comprehensive oversight of the logic behind them, I present some plain {\TeX}-commands that can be used directly in {\LaTeX}. As the editors of this journal decided to make English the preferred language for contributions, this column is no longer in Dutch. However, as far as my limited command of the language allows, I will try to keep the tone informal and the discussion accessible to novice users.}}} @ARTICLE{21-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{31-34}}, title = {{The 19th annual {\TeX} Users Group Meeting}}, keywords = {{TUG conference,Torun,Poland}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{120}}, author = {{Kaveh Bazargan, Philip Taylor}}, names = {{Kaveh Bazargan, Philip Taylor}}, abstract = {{The 19th annual {\TeX} Users Group Meeting took place in Torun, Poland, in August of this year. The following is the impression of the authors who tried to attend all the talks. Unfortunately a couple of the talks were not attended by either of the authors. Apologies to those authors.}}} @ARTICLE{21-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{35-39}}, title = {{Parameterized data for tables in {\TeX} -- Dynamics, aha!}}, keywords = {{BLUe,btable,code tables,data generation,dynamical markup,parameterization,tables,tail recursion}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{210}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The issue of generating and using parameterized data for tables in {\TeX} is elaborated upon. The automatic insertion of markup along with the use of parameterized markup and the \texttt{\btable} macro is not the issue, but are prerequisites. \texttt{\btable}'s use, along with the automatic insertion of markup in the data as such, can be seen as tools, stepping stones, which made it possible to concentrate on pure data generation, or its use in typesetting tables by {\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{21-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{40-41}}, title = {{Poor man's cyrillics on a Mac -- {\TeX}ing English and Russian}}, keywords = {{cyrillics,MIME,Macintosh,pdf{\TeX}}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{126}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{The typesetting in {\TeX} of English mixed with Russian is discussed for a Macintosh. Starting from the WNCY-fonts only a few extra control sequences have to be remembered for the keyboarding. The approach is suitable for all machines which have the WNCY-fonts. Email in cyrillics can be handled by formating via pdf{\TeX} and sending the .pdf file as attachment in a MIME message.}}} @ARTICLE{21-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{42-48}}, title = {{Minimal markup -- expansion in the gullet, aha!}}, keywords = {{BLUe,crosswords,expansion,fifo,look ahead,minimal markup,mouth processing,preprocessing,tables,tail recursion}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{211}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{A plea is made for a reappraisal of {\TeX}'s capabilities of expansion in the gullet of minimal marked up scripts into complete marked up scripts. Attention is focused on expansion of implicitly marked up table data by spaces and e-o-l-s into data separated by \texttt{\cs} and \texttt{\rs}, the abstract but explicit column and row separators, respectively. The ultimate aim is that the processing tool can't be distilled from the `marked up' script.}}} @ARTICLE{21-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{49-52}}, title = {{Catching up -- PDF and HTML at the heart}}, keywords = {{internet,HTML,multi-media,PDF,pdf{\TeX},PostScript,WWW}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{153}}, author = {{Kees van der Laan}}, names = {{Kees van der Laan}}, abstract = {{New hardware not only urged me to get {\TeX} \& Co running again, in a richer environment, but I had also to catch up with developments since. Most noteworthy in relation with {\TeX} and documents, are the acceptance of the PDF exchange format and the HTML format, next to the realization of multi-media.}}} @ARTICLE{21-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{ne}}, pages = {{53-60}}, title = {{Eenheid in eenheden}}, keywords = {{SI-units,units,{Con\TeX t}}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{166}}, author = {{Ton Otten, Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Ton Otten, Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{In order to support a consistent typography of units in technical documents the {Con\TeX t} module \texttt{units} was developed. When this module is loaded all SI-units are available. Seldom used and/or complex units can be defined by the user with the command \texttt{\unit[]{}{}}.}}} @ARTICLE{21-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{61-69}}, title = {{The {\TeX} backend for Jade and the Jade{\TeX} macros}}, keywords = {{jade,jadetex,dsssl}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{415}}, author = {{Sebastian Rahtz}}, names = {{Sebastian Rahtz}}, abstract = {{Jade is an implementation of the DSSSL specification, and includes a {\TeX} backend; the Jade{\TeX} macro package is needed to process the Jade {\TeX} output. We describe how Jade and Jade{\TeX} work together. This article was written for the newsletter of the International SGML Users Group.}}} @ARTICLE{21-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{70-84}}, title = {{Diversity in math fonts}}, keywords = {{math fonts,fontinst,MathTime,Lucida,mathptm,virtual fonts,math fonts,{\LaTeX}}}, year = {{1998}}, volume = {{21}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{1013}}, author = {{Thierry Bouche}}, names = {{Thierry Bouche}}, abstract = {{We will examine the issues raised when modifying (La){\TeX} fonts within math environments, and attempt to suggest effective means of accessing a larger variety of font options, while avoiding typographic nonsense.}}} @BOOK{maps22, type = {{book}}, language = {{EN/NL}}, pages = {{1-176}}, title = {{MAPS 99.1}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, editor = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{22-1, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1}}, title = {{Van de voorzitter}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, } @ARTICLE{22-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{2}}, title = {{Redactioneel}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{17}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}}, } @ARTICLE{22-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{3}}, title = {{NTG and {\TeX} info}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{22}}, author = {{NTG bestuur}}, names = {{NTG bestuur}}, } @ARTICLE{22-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{4}}, title = {{Letter from Donald Knuth}}, keywords = {{NTG logo,FGBBS}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Donald Knuth}}, names = {{Donald Knuth}}, } @ARTICLE{22-5, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{5-6}}, title = {{Bericht van voorheen FGBBS - Voorjaar 1999}}, keywords = {{FGBBS,geschiedenis}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{22}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, } @ARTICLE{22-6, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7-8}}, title = {{De NTG en het Internet}}, keywords = {{NTG discussionlist,discussionlist,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{31}}, author = {{Jules van Weerden}}, names = {{Jules van Weerden}}, abstract = {{De NTG is niet alleen met webpagina's op het Internet aanwezig, maar ook middels een aantal discussielijsten. In dit artikel wordt kort aangegeven wat een discussielijst is, hoe je je aan- en afmeldt en wat je te wachten staat na aanmelding. Tevens wordt een overzicht gegeven van de in Nederland aanwezige {\TeX}-gerelateerde lijsten.}}} @ARTICLE{22-7, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{9-10}}, title = {{Announcing Bacho{\TeX}'99}}, keywords = {{Bacho{\TeX},GUST,conference,announcement}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{600}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, } @ARTICLE{22-8, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{11}}, title = {{TUG'98, Torun, Polen}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{347}}, author = {{Redaktie}}, names = {{Redaktie}}, } @ARTICLE{22-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-31}}, title = {{Gezeefd uit de TEX-NL discussielijst}}, keywords = {{TEX-NL,guru,hints,hack,bugs}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{79}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Dit is het vijfde deel uit een serie die in 1993 door Philippe Vanoverbeke in de MAPS is gestart. Philippe maakte een selectie van berichten uit de TEX-NL lijst. Een aantal oplossingen, hints en gouden tips over onderwerpen waarvan je weleens denkt: ``hoe zat dat ook alweer?'' In de MAPS van voorjaar 1998 stond deel 4. Voor deze aflevering is een aantal berichten gezeefd uit TEX-NL van maart 1998 tot januari 1999. Met dank aan Piet van Oostrum die opnieuw de meeste antwoorden aandroeg, en aan de andere actieve abonnees van TEX-NL!}}} @ARTICLE{22-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{32-36}}, title = {{PostScript Fonts op computers?}}, keywords = {{fonts,PostScript fonts}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{85}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{Dit artikel geeft een korte inleiding in de interne werking van PostScript computer-fonts en hun coderingen. Dit artikel is een aanpassing van een serie slides die gepresenteerd werden op de NTG bijeenkomst van 22 oktober 1998 in Leuven.}}} @ARTICLE{22-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{37-42}}, title = {{How to install a Type1 font using fontinst}}, keywords = {{fontinst,Type 1 fonts,installation}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{53}}, author = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, abstract = {{In this brief tutorial I will describe how a PostScript Type 1 font can be made available to {\TeX} using the fontinst-utility (version 1.8). I will not delve into the technical details of this program or the exact functionality of each of the font files used during this process, as those aspects of font-installation are described in other articles in this issue of MAPS. I will not delve into the advanced features of fontinst either, but rather will provide a hands-on tutorial.}}} @ARTICLE{22-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{43-51}}, title = {{Installing PostScript Fonts Under Unix/Linux}}, keywords = {{fonts,PostScript,Linux,Adobe,dvips,GhostScript}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{80}}, author = {{Roland Kwee}}, names = {{Roland Kwee}}, abstract = {{This article discusses practical issues for installing Adobe PostScript fonts for {\TeX} running on Unix/Linux. It also presents a script for automating the installation in order to install a package with over 200 fonts. As a useful side effect, the script creates a font data base and a font catalog to help the buyer/user of the font collection.}}} @ARTICLE{22-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{52-54}}, title = {{NFSS: using font families in {\LaTeX}2e}}, keywords = {{NFSS,font families,font attributes}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{42}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{This paper gives a brief overview of the {\LaTeX}2e NFSS font machinery and font definition files. It also gives examples of ad-hoc font changes with low-level NFSS commands.}}} @ARTICLE{22-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{55-76}}, title = {{Fonts in {Con\TeX t}}}, keywords = {{{Con\TeX t},fonts,encodings,typography}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{237}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{This article is the revised chapter 5 of the {Con\TeX t} reference manual, typeset in the MAPS layout. We will pay attention to all kind of font switching, fine tuning, and also provide some background information. Special attention is paid to the mapping of font names to files and some words are spent on encodings. This text is typeset in Lucida Bright but within the layout specification of the MAPS.}}} @ARTICLE{22-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{77-80}}, title = {{De Euro in {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{euro teken,euro fonts}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{108}}, author = {{Hein Laan}}, names = {{Hein Laan}}, } @ARTICLE{22-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{81-88}}, title = {{A short introduction to font characteristics}}, keywords = {{typefaces,design,font classification}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{164}}, author = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, abstract = {{Almost anyone who develops an interest in fonts is bound to be overwelmed by the bewildering variety of letterforms available. The number of fonts available from commercial suppliers like Adobe, URW, LinoType and others runs into the thousands. A recent catalog issued by FontShop alone lists over 25.000 different varieties. And somehow, although the differences of the individual letters are hardly noticable, each font has its own character, its own personality. Even the atmosphere elucided by a text set from Adobe Garamond is noticably different from the atmosphere of the same text set from Stempel Garamond. Although decisions about the usage of fonts, will always remain in the realm of esthetics, some knowledge about font characteristics may nevertheless help to create some order and to find out why certain design decisions just do not work. The main aim of this paper is to provide such background by describing the main aspects that might be used to describe a font.}}} @ARTICLE{22-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{89-93}}, title = {{Introducing Eetex}}, keywords = {{e-{\TeX},ee{\TeX},extensions,SGML}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{50}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater, Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater, Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{This article gives an introduction to eetex. Eetex is an extension to e-tex 2.0 that defines a collection of new primitives. Most of these deal with list data structures, but some other things are added as well.}}} @ARTICLE{22-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{94-114}}, title = {{The pdf{\TeX} users manual}}, keywords = {{pdf{\TeX},manual}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{145}}, author = {{H\`an Th\^e Th\`anh, Sebastian Rahtz, Hans Hagen}}, names = {{H\`an Th\^e Th\`anh, Sebastian Rahtz, Hans Hagen}}, } @ARTICLE{22-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{115-116}}, title = {{Introducing V{\TeX}/Linux}}, keywords = {{VTeX,Linux,port,MicroPress}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{30}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater, Michael Vulis}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater, Michael Vulis}}, abstract = {{This document is a short introduction to V{\TeX} for Linux, a partial port of V{\TeX} that is free for non-commercial use. The most interesting feature of the compiler is the use of PDF as a backend instead of DVI.}}} @ARTICLE{22-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{117-122}}, title = {{Introducing GeX}}, keywords = {{PDF,inline graphics,EPS inclusion,GeX,VTeX}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{75}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater, Michael Vulis}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater, Michael Vulis}}, abstract = {{This is a short introduction to the pilot release of GeX. GeX is the most rapidly evolving part of V{\TeX}; more detailed documentation is available in the distribution of V{\TeX}. This article specifically describes GeX as implemented in the public domain version of V{\TeX}/Linux. While the same or additional features may be available in the commercial Windows version, we describe what exists in the freely downloadable version. For information on downloading V{\TeX}/Linux see the NTG web site or the article in this MAPS issue.}}} @ARTICLE{22-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{123-126}}, title = {{4Spell, a spell-checker for Windows 95/98/NT}}, keywords = {{4spell,4{\TeX},spell checker}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{82}}, author = {{Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{In this paper we will describe the features of 4Spell 1.1, a Windows spell-checker for {\TeX} documents. Since there aren't many good spell-checkers around and since 4Spell only works on Windows platforms, we will also explain how the spell-checking is done. This should make it possible to write a spell-checker for other platforms (why not use perl and become platform independent :-) 4Spell is part of the new 4{\TeX} for Windows (release expected by the end of March 1999). We realized, however, that this tool could be useful for people who do not want to use 4{\TeX} and hence we made it a stand-alone freeware program.}}} @ARTICLE{22-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{127-129}}, title = {{4Project: a project manager for {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{project management}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{76}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{A new project manager, 4Project, analyses your {\TeX} document and gives you easy access to any item in it.}}} @ARTICLE{22-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{130-135}}, title = {{How Perl can help {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{Perl,mfpic,mkpic}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{85}}, author = {{Wybo Dekker}}, names = {{Wybo Dekker}}, abstract = {{Perl may be an easy interface to {\TeX} when it comes to repetitive tasks, like writing letters, creating reports from databases, and many more. This article shows how Perl can be used to generate many similar pictures via the \texttt{mfpic} style}}} @ARTICLE{22-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{136-141}}, title = {{Is {\TeX} Y2K-compliant?}}, keywords = {{millennium,Y2K}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{72}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{Will {\TeX} and related programs continue to work properly after the year 2000? This article describes how {\TeX} deals with dates and how this affects its behavior after the year 2000.}}} @ARTICLE{22-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{142-143}}, title = {{A Database for PPCHTeX}}, keywords = {{PPCH{\TeX},chemistry,structure formulas,databases}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{23}}, author = {{Richard M\"uller}}, names = {{Richard M\"uller}}, abstract = {{A database with PPCHTeX code would ease the work for those who have to draw chemical formulas only occasionally and have no time to become acquainted with it. But experts could also make use of it. The establishing of such a database is discussed and proposed.}}} @ARTICLE{22-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{144-147}}, title = {{Beginnen met {Con\TeX t}}}, keywords = {{{Con\TeX t},tutorial}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{38}}, author = {{Berend de Boer}}, names = {{Berend de Boer}}, } @ARTICLE{22-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{148-152}}, title = {{Optimizing {\TeX} code}}, keywords = {{speeding up,format,optimizing code,e-{\TeX},{Con\TeX t}}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{57}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{Macros can be collected in macro packages. These packages can be stored in a form that permits fast loading. Although {\TeX} is already pretty fast, for demanding applications it makes sense to speed up {\TeX} to the max. Switching to e-{\TeX} and beyond is one way to achieve this, another way can be found in optimizing the macro code by means of a dedicated program. Currently the combination of both can speed up {\TeX} runs by at least 10%.}}} @ARTICLE{22-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{153-161}}, title = {{Tabulating in {Con\TeX t}}}, keywords = {{tables,alignment,{Con\TeX t}}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{54}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{This article describes the {Con\TeX t} tabulate environment, which can be used to typeset tables that are part of the text flow. This mechanism differs from the TaBlE based table mechanism, but recognizes the same preamble commands. It offers automatic width calculations when typesetting (multiple) paragraphs in tables and splits the tables over pages.}}} @ARTICLE{22-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{161}}, title = {{Bug or Feature? -- misleading font messages}}, keywords = {{fonts,error messages}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{17}}, author = {{Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{{\TeX} error messages and warnings are not always that clear. Sometimes confusion is due to optimizations in {\TeX} the program. We will discuss the noty always honest \texttt{\the\font}.}}} @ARTICLE{22-30, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{162-163}}, title = {{Don't give authors the class files!}}, keywords = {{publishing}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{21}}, author = {{Kaveh Bazargan}}, names = {{Kaveh Bazargan}}, } @ARTICLE{22-31, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{164-167}}, title = {{Robin Williams over typografie -- een dame geeft raad}}, keywords = {{typography,fonts,design,expert,book review}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{116}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Tijdens de heuglijke NTG-dag in het vorstelijke Leuven vond ik op de boekentafel van Addison-Wesley twee leuk uitziende boeken over typografie en ontwerp. Mooie, knalgele boekjes die even onderhoudend als leerzaam bleken, geschreven door Robin Williams: \emph{The Non-designers's Type Book} en \emph{The Non-designers's Design Book}. Ik sla er \'e\'en voor u open.}}} @ARTICLE{22-32, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{168-173}}, title = {{Typography to a purpose}}, keywords = {{graphic design,typography}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{941}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{This paper shows some real-life examples of typography, some good, some not so good. We shall have a look at what is on the page and speculate about what the publisher or designer is trying to accomplish.}}} @ARTICLE{22-33, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{174-175}}, title = {{Report on {\TeX}-Tagung Dante'99 in Dortmund}}, keywords = {{report,Dante,NTS,e-{\TeX}}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{22}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{30}}, author = {{Erik Frambach, Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Erik Frambach, Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{A report on Dante's 20th meeting which took place in Dortmund. The future of the NTS project and the e-{\TeX} project were hot issues that were discussed during this meeting.}}} @BOOK{maps23, type = {{book}}, language = {{EN/NL}}, pages = {{1-116}}, title = {{MAPS 99.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, editor = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{23-1, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1}}, title = {{Redactioneel}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{35}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}}, } @ARTICLE{23-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{2}}, title = {{NTG and {\TeX} info}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{48}}, author = {{NTG bestuur}}, names = {{NTG bestuur}}, } @ARTICLE{23-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{3-4}}, title = {{De NTG en het Internet (1999/2)}}, keywords = {{discussionlist,TEX-NL}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{72}}, author = {{Jules van Weerden, Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Jules van Weerden, Maarten Gelderman}}, } @ARTICLE{23-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{5-7}}, title = {{{\TeX} User Groups around the world}}, keywords = {{{\TeX} user groups,addresses}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{92}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, } @ARTICLE{23-5, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{8-12}}, title = {{TUG'99, Vancouver}}, keywords = {{{\TeX} user groups,Vancouver,TUG conference}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{178}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, } @ARTICLE{23-6, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{13-31}}, title = {{Gezeefd uit de TEX-NL discussielijst}}, keywords = {{TEX-NL,guru,hints,hack,bugs}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{191}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{Dit is het zesde deel uit een serie die in 1993 door Philippe Vanoverbeke in de MAPS is gestart. Philippe maakte een selectie van berichten uit de TEX-NL lijst. Een aantal oplossingen, hints en gouden tips over onderwerpen waarvan je weleens denkt: ``hoe zat dat ook alweer?'' In de MAPS van najaar 1998 stond deel 5. Voor deze aflevering is een aantal berichten gezeefd uit TEX-NL van maart 1999 tot juli 1999.}}} @ARTICLE{23-7, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{32-47}}, title = {{The NTG MAPS bibliography -- from SGML to {\TeX} to PDF}}, keywords = {{CDROM,{Con\TeX t},NTG,MAPS,PDF,SGML,XML}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{125}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{A few years ago, the NTG decided to put their MAPS volumes on the internet in the PDF file format. At about the same time, it was decided to build the associated bibliography in such a way that it could be used to produce both a HTML and PDF document. \\ Recently, the MAPS bibliography has been converted to a proper XML document source. In the process, the descriptions were made as consistent as possible. The XML source was used as input for a PDF document, that provides extensive browse and search options. This PDF file, along with the MAPS articles, is provided to NTG members as an additional service. \\ In this article the electronic NTG MAPS will be presented and the specific characteristics of the production process will be explained. Also, some of the complicating aspects will be discussed. I assume that the reader is familiar with SGML and {\TeX}. The focus will be on the interface between SGML, {\TeX} and PDF.}}} @ARTICLE{23-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{48-52}}, title = {{4{\TeX} 5.0 for Windows and the 4all{\TeX} CDroms}}, keywords = {{4{\TeX},4all{\TeX},Windows,software}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{190}}, author = {{Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{Every year many software distributors launch a new version of their software products. They all tell you that there are fundamental improvements and bug fixes and that you have to upgrade immediately. With the release of edition 5 of 4all{\TeX} you could ask yourself what this new edition offers as compared to e.g. the older versions of 4all{\TeX} and the {\TeX}-live CDrom. Below we will give a summary of all of the goodies of the new 4all{\TeX} distribution and give you pointers to the internet where you can find more information.}}} @ARTICLE{23-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{53-55}}, title = {{Toolbox: the toolbox?}}, keywords = {{mail-merge,regular expressions,emacs,Excel,makefiles,toolbox}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{79}}, author = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, abstract = {{This MAPS is about the {\TeX} Toolbox, about other programs than {\TeX} itself. So this MAPS's toolbox should probably deal with this kind of material. As a consequence this toolbox is even more eclectic than earlier ones. First I will show you how I make mailings to NTG-members, by combining Excel and {\LaTeX}. Next I will present the most ugly regular expression I know of, and finally I will say something about using makefiles.}}} @ARTICLE{23-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{56-68}}, title = {{Maak een logo met behulp van literate programming}}, keywords = {{literate programming,WEB,Nuweb,logos}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{82}}, author = {{Paul Huygen}}, names = {{Paul Huygen}}, abstract = {{In dit artikel wordt beschreven hoe de \emph{literate programming} techniek gebruikt kan worden om complexe taken uit te voeren en te documenteren. Als voorbeeld wordt een logo ontworpen met behulp van de gereedschappen AWK, pic{\TeX} en {\LaTeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{23-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{69-71}}, title = {{Zet tekst op een vaste plaats op een bladzijde}}, keywords = {{DTP,{\LaTeX}}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{106}}, author = {{Paul Huygen}}, names = {{Paul Huygen}}, abstract = {{In dit artikel is beschreven hoe een {\LaTeX} probleem werd opgelost door het aan de {\TeX} kopstukken voor te leggen via de NTG mailing list. Het concrete {\LaTeX} probleem was het plaatsen van tekst op een vaste plaats op een bladzijde.}}} @ARTICLE{23-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{72-74}}, title = {{DTP with {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{programming,DTP,vertical mode}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{68}}, author = {{Roland Kwee}}, names = {{Roland Kwee}}, abstract = {{A set of simple macros is presented, in the style of modular programming, to make it easy to put texts at arbitrary positions on the page, without being restricted by formatting rules. This is not only useful for single-page documents like announcements and business cards, but also for designing stationery with letterheads or printing labels. The method is based on putting kerned texts in boxes with zero horizontal and vertical size and staying in vertical mode. This works with plain, and any other, {\TeX} and can be combined with any other document formatting.}}} @ARTICLE{23-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{75-76}}, title = {{Het gebruik van KIX (tm) in {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{KIX,font,barcode,PTT}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{30}}, author = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, abstract = {{Recentelijk introduceerde de Nederlandse PTT de zogenaamde KIX (tm)-code. Deze KlantIndex is een streepjescode die gebruikte wordt ten behoeve van de automatische verwerking van poststukken. In dit artikel laat ik zien hoe KIX met relatief weinig moeite gebruikt kan worden binnen {\TeX} en {\LaTeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{23-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{77-83}}, title = {{An Extended Maths Font Set for Processing MathML}}, keywords = {{math,fonts,PostScript,METAFONT}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{139}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{Last years autumn, work started on a new set of mathematical fonts that are intended to cover the full range of characters included in MathML as well as those included in the proposals for mathematical extensions in the next version of Unicode.\\ This paper presents the first result of that work: A new Times-compatible maths font set consisting of about 1500 symbols and a few alphabets; along with a collection of {\TeX} macros to use them.\\ These fonts are donated to the public domain by Kluwer Academic Publishers and are available in both METAFONT source and Adobe Type 1 formats.}}} @ARTICLE{23-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{84-89}}, title = {{{\TeX} as presentation tool -- an introduction to the {Con\TeX t} presentation environments}}, keywords = {{{Con\TeX t},presentation,slides,transparencies,PDF}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{97}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{In this article I will introduce a few styles I wrote on behalf of presentations. These styles are part of the {Con\TeX t} distribution and can serve as an example of defining layouts in this macro package. More details can be found in the documented styles.}}} @ARTICLE{23-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{90-102}}, title = {{Typesetting flow charts -- let {\TeX} and METAPOST do the job}}, keywords = {{flowcharts,graphics,charts,METAPOST,{\TeX}}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{178}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{This article presents the {Con\TeX t} module that deals with flowcharts and related types of charts. The charts are drawn at run--time by METAPOST in close cooperation with {\TeX}. This not only gives us rather good graphics, but also provides a seamless integration of flow charts in documents, including hyperlink support and other fancy features.}}} @ARTICLE{23-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{103-107}}, title = {{ASCII editors for {\TeX} on MS-Windows}}, keywords = {{ASCII editors,Windows,comparison}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{345}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{There are many good ASCII editor programs available for {\TeX}-users using MS-Windows. However, they all have there strong points and their weaknesses. In this article I will discuss a few of them.}}} @ARTICLE{23-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{108-112}}, title = {{Using Emacs and Auc{\TeX} for preparing {\LaTeX} documents}}, keywords = {{emacs,Auc{\TeX},{\LaTeX},{\TeX},packages,editing}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{279}}, author = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, names = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, abstract = {{Users of {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} can be helped very much by an editor that knows about the specifics of these packages. For instance it can do syntax coloring so that the user sees immediately the difference between normal text and {\TeX} commands; it can insert skeletons for often used commands and environments in order to prevent missing elements (e.g. missing \end parts), etc.\\ This article describes the use of the Emacs editing environment with the Auc{\TeX} package for the preparation of {\LaTeX} documents. The main characteristics of Emacs are discussed, followed by a more detailed description of the facilities that Auc{\TeX} offers to assist the author of {\LaTeX} documents. Finally we describe how Auc{\TeX} can be customized to support your own or external commands and {\LaTeX} packages.}}} @ARTICLE{23-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{112-116}}, title = {{Tools for PostScript and PDF}}, keywords = {{PostScript,DSC comments,PDF,GhostScript,graphics,conversion,EPS inclusion,bounding box}}, year = {{1999}}, volume = {{23}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{135}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{This paper explains why PostScript is interesting for {\TeX} users, and describes various tools for working with PostScript, with special attention to GhostScript. The paper concludes with a section on PDF, the derivative of PostScript which is destined to take over much of the role of PostScript in the prepress workflow.}}} @BOOK{maps24, type = {{book}}, language = {{EN/NL}}, pages = {{1-92}}, title = {{MAPS 2000.1}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, editor = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{24-1, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1}}, title = {{Redactioneel}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{29}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}}, } @ARTICLE{24-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{2}}, title = {{NTG- en {\TeX} Info}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{18}}, author = {{NTG bestuur}}, names = {{NTG bestuur}}, } @ARTICLE{24-3, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{3-6}}, title = {{Praten met drukkers -- Een coproduktie van de MAPS-redaktie en het NTG-bestuur}}, keywords = {{drukkers,PostScript,DocuTech}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{49}}, author = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, abstract = {{Een beschrijving van de perikelen rondom het aanleveren van PostScript output aan een drukker.}}} @ARTICLE{24-4, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7-8}}, title = {{{\LaTeX} met \'e\'en toets vanuit vi}}, keywords = {{shell script,vi,{\LaTeX},Unix}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{37}}, author = {{Sven Bovin}}, names = {{Sven Bovin}}, abstract = {{De ontstaansgeschiedenis van een shell script om vanuit vi met \'e\'en toets {\LaTeX} op te roepen en, indien nodig, xdvi te starten voor het previewen.}}} @ARTICLE{24-5, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{9-11}}, title = {{Building a {\TeX} installation for distribution}}, keywords = {{texmf tree,Windows,Linux,Perl,Configuration}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{72}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{At Kluwer Academic Publishers we use {\TeX} for typesetting journals. Since there are obvious advantages to using a standardized distribution, we provide our typesetters with one on CD. This article describes the principles of this setup.}}} @ARTICLE{24-6, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{12-26}}, title = {{Typesetting modern \& contemporary poetry with {\LaTeX}}}, keywords = {{poetry}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{464}}, author = {{Thierry Bouche}}, names = {{Thierry Bouche}}, abstract = {{{\TeX}: a typesetting engine limited to scientific publishing? Where would be the fun?}}} @ARTICLE{24-7, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{27-37}}, title = {{The Design and Use of a Multiple-Alphabet Font with Omega}}, keywords = {{Omega,Multiple-Alphabet Font,omlgc}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{168}}, author = {{Yannis Haralambous, John Plaice}}, names = {{Yannis Haralambous, John Plaice}}, abstract = {{The Omega project aims to offer open and flexible means for typesetting different scripts. By working at several different levels, it is possible to offer natural support for different languages and scripts, and strictly respect typographical traditions for each of them. This is illustrated with a large PostScript Type 1 font for the commonly used left-to-right non-cursive alphabets, called \texttt{omlgc} (Omega Latin-Greek-Cyrillic). This font, which more than covers the Unicode sections pertaining to those alphabets, as well as those of IPA, Armenian, Georgian and Tifinagh (Berber), is built--virtually--out of smaller glyph banks. The Omega typesetting engine, based on that of {\TeX}, is used to print documents using this font. The characters can be accessed either directly, or through the use of filters, called Omega Typesetting Processes (OTPs), which are applied to the input stream.}}} @ARTICLE{24-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{38-40}}, title = {{{\TeX} in Polish}}, keywords = {{Polish,ogonek,input encoding}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{60}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{Writing in Polish with {\TeX} requires a few tricks. In Polish you need several accents that are often not available in `standard' fonts. Some {\TeX} macros can solve this problem more or less. We will show the pros and cons. Another `problem' is input encoding. One can use 8-bit input in combination with the corresponding codepage definition, or a 7-bit encoding with a few extras to make typing easier. Both methods will be discussed. This article reflects the content of a lecture held at the NTG meeting on 11 November 1999.}}} @ARTICLE{24-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{41-43}}, title = {{Toolbox}}, keywords = {{make,texexec,PDF,EPS,math fonts,toolbox}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{69}}, author = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, abstract = {{This toolbox contains some varia. First I discuss some reactions on remarks I made in an earlier toolbox. Next, Hans Hagens \texttt{texexec} is used in the following section to create EPS and PDF files from METAPOST source. Files created this way are often more usefull than the EPS files METAPOST itself creates. How to prepare a single source file for usage with both traditional {\TeX} and pdf{\TeX} is discussed next. I also show how easy it is to set up a font different from Computer Modern for typesetting simple mathematics, pay some attention to a failed attempt to install a TrueType font and present a small PostScript header file that can be used to produce watermarks.}}} @ARTICLE{24-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{44-45}}, title = {{Making stand alone METAPOST graphics}}, keywords = {{METAPOST,PDF,pdf{\TeX}}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{36}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{When a METAPOST graphic uses fonts, the PostScript file is not self contained and hardly usable outside {\TeX}. One can however use {\TeX} itself, or actually pdf{\TeX}, to create such a graphic. Although this method uses an {Con\TeX t} module, the solution provided here is independant of this macro package. The macros responsible for the process are collected in the file \texttt{mptopdf.tex}.}}} @ARTICLE{24-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{46-48}}, title = {{Typesetting CD labels}}, keywords = {{CDROM labels,\parshape}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{52}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, abstract = {{Now that CD burners are becoming standard equipment in personal computers, there is a need for software to typeset CD labels. Of course, one can just squeeze a normal paragraph of text in the confines of a label, but it would be much more elegant to set the text to use all the available space. In this short article I will explain the macros that I wrote during a Christmas holiday, and that contain a few neat tricks.}}} @ARTICLE{24-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{49-51}}, title = {{The ultimate loop macro}}, keywords = {{programming,loop macro}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{38}}, author = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, names = {{Victor Eijkhout}}, abstract = {{The plain {\TeX} format contains a \loop macro that has been a source of frustration and puzzlement to users ever since. Its syntax is somewhat strange, you have to insert an \if... condition in it but cannot use \else, and nested use of the macro runs into various problems. In this article I will describe my own improved loop macro, which I've called \repeat to prevent confusion.}}} @ARTICLE{24-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{52-53}}, title = {{Annotating presentations}}, keywords = {{{Con\TeX t},presentations}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{51}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{Today most presentations are enlightened by text shown on transparencies or using video beamers. This text is often rather limited in size. In this article I present a method of annotating pages that can be used with the {Con\TeX t} presentation styles.}}} @ARTICLE{24-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{54-57}}, title = {{Postprocessing PDF files--an application of {\TeX}exec and pdf{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{PDF,postprocessing,texexec,pdf{\TeX}}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{46}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{This article introduces some ways to manipulate PDF files using pdf{\TeX}, {Con\TeX t}, and {\TeX}exec. The method described here can be used for arbitrary PDF input, given that it can be handled by pdf{\TeX}.}}} @ARTICLE{24-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{59-64}}, title = {{Literate Programming}}, keywords = {{Literate Programming,Structured Programming,WEB}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{142}}, author = {{Michael Guravage}}, names = {{Michael Guravage}}, abstract = {{This article is a short introduction to the theory and practice of a programming style known as Literate Programming; a style that changes the focus of writing programs away from telling a computer what to do and toward explaining to a person what it is we are telling the computer to do. Literate Programming overcomes the limitations inherent in presenting traditionally structured program text. Using a balanced mix of informal and formal methods, literate programs are presented in a way suited for human understanding. Processing a literate program source results in both a nicely typeset document describing the parts of the program in an order that elucidates their design, and source code in an order in which it will compile.}}} @ARTICLE{24-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{65-92}}, title = {{{\LaTeX} in proper {Con\TeX t}}}, keywords = {{{Con\TeX t},tutorial}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{24}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{80}}, author = {{Berend de Boer}}, names = {{Berend de Boer}}, abstract = {{If you are a {\LaTeX} user, switching to an entirely different macro-package is a very big step. Everything you put so much effort in to learn, doesn't work anymore. To help lessen the pain for users make the switch, this document shows short {\LaTeX} code snippets and how you do the same in {Con\TeX t}.}}} @BOOK{maps25, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-124}}, title = {{MAPS 2000.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{1334}}, editor = {{Sven Bovin}}, names = {{Sven Bovin}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{25-1, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1}}, title = {{Redactioneel}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{31}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg, Sven Bovin}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg, Sven Bovin}}, } @ARTICLE{25-2, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{2-3}}, title = {{Euro{\TeX}2001 conference}}, keywords = {{Euro{\TeX},conference}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{41}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{Announcement of the 12th European {\TeX} Conference, which will be held in Kerkrade in the Netherlands, from 23 to 27 September 2001. The theme is ``{\TeX} and Meta: the Good, the Bad and the Ugly Bits''.}}} @ARTICLE{25-3, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{4-5}}, title = {{De NTG en het Internet}}, keywords = {{discussielijsten,TEX-NL}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{46}}, author = {{Jules van Weerden, Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Jules van Weerden, Maarten Gelderman}}, abstract = {{De NTG is niet alleen met webpagina's op het Internet aanwezig, maar ook middels een aantal discussielijsten. In dit artikel wordt kort aangegeven wat een discussielijst is, hoe je je aan- en afmeldt en wat je te wachten staat na aanmelding. Tevens wordt een overzicht gegeven van de in Nederland aanwezige {\TeX}-gerelateerde lijsten.}}} @ARTICLE{25-4, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{6-8}}, title = {{{\TeX} user groups around the world}}, keywords = {{user groups}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{48}}, author = {{Erik Frambach, Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Erik Frambach, Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{A list of all {\TeX} user groups currently known to us.}}} @ARTICLE{25-5, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{9-12}}, title = {{Nieuws van CTAN}}, keywords = {{{\TeX},{\LaTeX},packages,CTAN,proceedings}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{54}}, author = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, names = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, abstract = {{Dit artikel beschrijft een aantal recente bijdragen uit het CTAN archief. Het is de bedoeling om in elke MAPS zo'n artikel te plaatsen. Ik zal hierbij \'e\'en of meer bijdragen wat uitvoeriger beschrijven en andere bijdragen kort noemen. De selectie is gebaseerd op wat ik zelf interessant vind en wat ik denk dat voor veel anderen interessant is. Het is dus een persoonlijke keuze. Het heeft niet de bedoeling om een volledig overzicht te geven. De uitgebreidere bijdragen zijn ook geen handleidingen. Beschouw het maar als een soort menukaart die de bedoeling heeft om de lezer te laten watertanden.}}} @ARTICLE{25-6, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{13-18}}, title = {{{Con\TeX t} en pdf{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{{Con\TeX t},pdf(e)-{\TeX},installatie,nieuws}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{55}}, author = {{Berend de Boer}}, names = {{Berend de Boer}}, abstract = {{In deze sectie zal het laatst bekende nieuws op het gebied van pdf{\TeX} en {Con\TeX t} aan de inner crowds worden ontfutseld. In deze eerste aflevering komt aan bod wat de laatste versies van pdf{\TeX} en {Con\TeX t} zijn. En tevens waar je ze kunt halen. En verder in iedere aflevering een {Con\TeX t} tip: vandaag over het produceren van A5 boekjes die op A4 worden afgedrukt.}}} @ARTICLE{25-7, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{19-55}}, title = {{Gezeefd uit de TEX-NL discussielijst}}, keywords = {{TEX-NL,discussielijsten}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{180}}, author = {{Frans Goddijn}}, names = {{Frans Goddijn}}, abstract = {{This is part seven in a series of articles started in 1993 by Philippe Vanoverbeke. Philippe selected a number of messages from the TEX-NL mailing list which deserved to be remembered and lookup up by readers of MAPS. Solutions, hints and tips. MAPS of fall 1999 had part 5. This installment more or less covers august 1999 through july 2000. During a hectic year I had missed most messages and working through the backlog for this article provided me with a useful and time consuming opportunity to see what I would have missed otherwise. Questions and answers are marked in twins but sometimes a reply poses a new question, invoking one more answer, making for an instructive thread. As before, honorary member Piet van Oostrum, and also Hans Hagen are always helpful members of the list. To them and all the others feeding the list with their stimulating questions and helpful answers thanks!}}} @ARTICLE{25-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{56-71}}, title = {{Toolbox: een syllabus}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},packages,praktijkvoorbeeld}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{137}}, author = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, names = {{Maarten Gelderman}}, abstract = {{In deze toolbox wordt een voorbeeld besproken van een redelijk omvangrijk {\LaTeX}-document. Het nut van de verschillende packages komt aan de orde en er wordt tevens besproken hoe de packages worden gebruikt in het document zelf en welke opties daarvoor in de preamble moeten worden opgenomen.}}} @ARTICLE{25-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{72-73}}, title = {{The {\TeX}Live CDROM}}, keywords = {{{\TeX} Live,Unix}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{34}}, author = {{Wybo Dekker}}, names = {{Wybo Dekker}}, abstract = {{Recently all NTG members received the latest {\TeX}Live cdrom. This article describes a quick and efficient method of installing the content of the {\TeX} repository. Since you can download the latest cdrom image via the internet, you can also use this method for occasional updates.}}} @ARTICLE{25-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{74-78}}, title = {{pdf{\TeX}'s little secret}}, keywords = {{pdf,pdf{\TeX},{Con\TeX t},em{\TeX},specials,positioning}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{54}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{It is no secret that pdf{\TeX} introduces new primitives, but some of them are less known than others. In this article I will describe an example of the use of \pdfsavepos cum suis. We will investigate their usage by implementing a simple em{\TeX} specials simulator.}}} @ARTICLE{25-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{79-80}}, title = {{Typesetting pdf annotations}}, keywords = {{pdf,fdf,annotations,pdf{\TeX},{Con\TeX t}}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{127}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{This article describes how to use pdf{\TeX} to typeset annotations added to pdf documents. This method uses {Con\TeX t} but can be applied to any valid pdf document.}}} @ARTICLE{25-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{81-85}}, title = {{Hanging punctuation, a pdf{\TeX} microtypographic extension}}, keywords = {{micro typography,margins,kerning,pdf{\TeX},{Con\TeX t}}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{74}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{At the time of this writing, H\`an Th\^e Th\`anh is writing his thesis, wherein he explains in great detail two extensions to {\TeX}'s typesetting engine. In this article we will explore marginal kerning, or character protruding. We will demonstrate the effects and introduce the new primitives, as well as explain how to enable this feature in {Con\TeX t}.}}} @ARTICLE{25-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{86-102}}, title = {{Antykwa P\'o{\l}tawskiego: a parameterize outline font}}, keywords = {{Antykwa P\'o{\l}tawskiego,fonts,Type 1 fonts,METAFONT,METAPOST}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{672}}, author = {{Bogus{\l}aw Jackowski, Janusz Nowacki, Piotr Strzelczyk}}, names = {{Bogus{\l}aw Jackowski, Janusz Nowacki, Piotr Strzelczyk}}, abstract = {{The implementation of the Antykwa P\'o{\l}tawskiego font in METAPOST and its conversion to PostScript Type1 outline font.}}} @ARTICLE{25-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{103-113}}, title = {{A macro routine for writing text along a path in METAPOST}}, keywords = {{TXP,METAPOST,{\LaTeX},METAGRAF,awk,{\TeX}}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{95}}, author = {{Santiago Muelas}}, names = {{Santiago Muelas}}, abstract = {{In this article we show a general macro written in \emph{pure METAPOST} for putting \emph{any} text using \emph{any} font over \emph{any} path. The routine will be explained in detail and some graphics will be included for clarifying purposes. Very special thanks are due to Maarten Gelderman who has made the final translation with the biggest care and interest.}}} @ARTICLE{25-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{114-124}}, title = {{MetaFun, Chapter 3: Embedded graphics}}, keywords = {{METAPOST,MetaFun,{Con\TeX t},graphics}}, year = {{2000}}, volume = {{25}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{76}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{This article is a nearly 100% copy of chapter 3 of the MetaFun manual. This chapter discusses a few alternative ways to define and include METAPOST graphics in a document. This article contains some colors, so if you want to get the real picture, you should fetch the MetaFun manual from www.pragma-ade.com (beta manual download page). The MetaFun macros (METAPOST as well as {\TeX}) are part of the regular {Con\TeX t} distribution.}}} @PROCEEDINGS{proceedings, type = {{proceedings}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{1-246}}, title = {{MAPS 2001.2}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS,Euro{\TeX},proceedings}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{4609}}, editor = {{Simon Pepping}}, names = {{Simon Pepping}}, abstract = {{Euro{\TeX} proceedings}}} @ARTICLE{26-1, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{1-4}}, title = {{Editorial}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{45}}, editor = {{Simon Pepping}}, names = {{Simon Pepping}}, } @ARTICLE{26-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{5}}, title = {{A note about the design of the Proceedings}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{57}}, editor = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, } @ARTICLE{26-3, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{7-17}}, title = {{Pattern Generation Revisited}}, keywords = {{patterns,Unicode,hyphenation,tagging,transformation,Omega,PatGen,PatLib,reimplementation,templates,C++}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{132}}, author = {{David Anto{\v s}, Petr Sojka}}, names = {{David Anto{\v s}, Petr Sojka}}, abstract = {{The program PatGen, being nearly twenty years old, doesn't suit today's needs: it is nearly impossible to make changes, as the program is highly optimised (like {\TeX}); it is limited to eight-bit encodings; it uses static data structures; reuse of the pattern technique and packed trie data structure for problems other than hyphenation (context dependent ligature handling, spell checking, Thai syllabification, etc) is cumbersome. Those and other reasons explained further in the paper led us to the decision to reimplement PatGen from scratch in an object-oriented manner (like NTS - New Typesetting System reimplementation of {\TeX}) and to create the PATtern LIBrary PatLib and the (hyphenation) pattern generator based on it. We argue that this general approach allows the code to be used in many applications in computer typesetting area, in addition to those of pattern recognition, which include various natural language processing, optical character recognition, and others.}}} @ARTICLE{26-4, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{18}}, title = {{Use of {\TeX} plugin technology for displaying of real-time weather and geographic information}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{22}}, author = {{S. Austin, D. Menshikov, Michael Vulis}}, names = {{S. Austin, D. Menshikov, Michael Vulis}}, abstract = {{In this article we show how by means of the GeX plugin technology one can process and display geographic information including real-time weather data as part of a {\TeX} to PDF compilation.}}} @ARTICLE{26-5, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{19-26}}, title = {{{\TeX}lib: a {\TeX} reimplementation in library form}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{90}}, author = {{Giuseppe Bilotta}}, names = {{Giuseppe Bilotta}}, abstract = {{I first came across the need for a {\TeX} in library form when I was thinking about developing a graphical real-time front-end to {\TeX} (the {\TeX}Perfect project, more info at http://texperfect.sourceforge.net). A quick survey (on the comp.text.tex newsgroup) showed that other projects could have benefited from a library providing {\TeX} typesetting capabilities, and I thus decided to develop {\TeX}lib as a separate project from {\TeX}Perfect. A `call for developers' on the same newsgroup provided the project with developers/consultants/helpers.}}} @ARTICLE{26-6, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{27-39}}, title = {{From database to presentation via XML, XSLT and Con{\TeX}t}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{132}}, author = {{Berend de Boer}}, names = {{Berend de Boer}}, abstract = {{Much data exists only in databases. A familiar example is an address list. Every once in a while this data must be presented to humans. To continue with the address list example, annually an address list must be printed and mailed. In this article I attempt to given an exhaustive overview of going from structured data through {Con\TeX t} to output.}}} @ARTICLE{26-7, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{40}}, title = {{Usage of MathML for paper and web publishing}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{24}}, author = {{Tobias Burnus}}, names = {{Tobias Burnus}}, abstract = {{The Mathematical Meta Language (MathML) oft he World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) based on XML has gained more support in the last months. Looking at the W3C's list ofsof tware which supports MathML one sees that the number of applications which can produce MathML is rather long, but the list of applications supporting typesetting of MathML is rather short.}}} @ARTICLE{26-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{41-48}}, title = {{The Euromath System -- a structured XML editor and browser}}, keywords = {{structured editing,{\TeX},XML}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{331}}, author = {{J. Chleb{\'\i}kov\'a, J. Guri\čan, M. Nagy, I. Odrobina}}, names = {{J. Chleb{\'\i}kov\'a, J. Guri\čan, M. Nagy, I. Odrobina}}, abstract = {{The Euromath System is an XML WYSIWYG structured editor and browser with the possibility of {\TeX} input/output. It was developed within the Euromath Project and funded through the SCIENCE programme of the European Commission. Originally, the core of the Euromath System was based on the commercial SGML structured editor Grif. At present, the Euromath System is in the final stage of re-implementation based upon the public domain structured editor Thot and XML. During the re-implementation process several principal differences between the basic features of Thot and the basic purposes of the Euromath System had to be resolved.}}} @ARTICLE{26-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{49-58}}, title = {{Instant Preview and the {\TeX} daemon}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{125}}, author = {{Jonathan Fine}}, names = {{Jonathan Fine}}, abstract = {{Instant Preview is a new package, for use with Emacs and xdvi, that allows the user to preview instantly the file being edited. At normal typing speed, and on a 225MHz machine, it refreshes the preview screen with every keystroke. Instant Preview uses a new program, dvichop, that allows {\TeX} to process small files over 20 times quicker than usual. It avoids the overhead of starting {\TeX}. This combination of {\TeX} and dvichop is the {\TeX} daemon. One instance of the {\TeX} daemon can serve many programs. It can make {\TeX} available as a callable function. It can be used as the formatting engine of a WYSIWYG editor. This talk will demonstrate Instant Preview, describe its implementation, discuss its use with {\LaTeX}, sketch the architecture of a WYSIWYG {\TeX}, and call for volunteers to take the project forward.}}} @ARTICLE{26-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{59}}, title = {{{\TeX} and/or xml: good, bad and/or ugly}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{25}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{As a typesetting engine, {\TeX} can work pretty well with structured input. One can build interfaces that are reasonably well to work with and code in. XML on the other hand is purely meant for coding, and the more rigorous scheme prevents errors and makes reuse easy. Contrary to {\TeX}, xml is not equivalent to typesetting, although there are tools (and methods) to easily convert the code into other stuctured code (like HTML) that then can be handled by rendering engines. Should we abandon coding in {\TeX} in favor of xml? Should we abandon typesetting using {\TeX} in favor of real time rendering of relatively simple layout designs? Who are the good and bad guys in that world? And even more importantly: to what extent will document design (and style design) really change?}}} @ARTICLE{26-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{60}}, title = {{{\TeX} Top Publishing: an overview}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{24}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{{\TeX} is used for producing a broad range of documents: articles, journals, books, and anything you can think of. When {\TeX} came around, it was no big deal to beat most of those day's typesetting programs. But how well does {\TeX} compete today with mainstream Desk Top Publishing programs? What directions will publishing take and what role can {\TeX} play in the field of typesetting? What are today's publishing demands, what are the strong and what are the weak points of good old {\TeX}, and what can and should we expect from the successors of {\TeX}?}}} @ARTICLE{26-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{61-73}}, title = {{Con{\TeX}t Publication Module, the user documentation}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{94}}, author = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, names = {{Taco Hoekwater}}, abstract = {{This module takes care of references to publications and the typesetting of publication lists, as well as providing an interface between Bib{\TeX} and {Con\TeX t}. This is a preliminary version; changes may be needed or wanted in the near future. In particular, there are some minor issues with the multi-lingual interface that need to be solved.}}} @ARTICLE{26-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{74-94}}, title = {{mlbib{\TeX}: a New Implementation of bib{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{Bibliographies,multilingual features,{\LaTeX},bib{\TeX}}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{228}}, author = {{Jean-Michel Hufflen}}, names = {{Jean-Michel Hufflen}}, abstract = {{This paper describes mlbib{\TeX}, a new implementation of bib{\TeX} with multilingual features. We show how to use it as profitably as possible, and go thoroughly into compatibility between bib{\TeX}s current implementation and ours. Besides, the precise grammar of mlbibtex is given as an annex.}}} @ARTICLE{26-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{95-110}}, title = {{Special fonts}}, keywords = {{cmdfont,special commands,METAPOST,fonts,postscript}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{172}}, author = {{Bogus{\l}aw Jackowski, Krzysztof Leszczy\ński}}, names = {{Bogus{\l}aw Jackowski, Krzysztof Leszczy\ński}}, abstract = {{We propose the use of a special pseudofont as an enhancement (in a sense) of the \special instruction. The examples of the implementation show that the technique applied here would prove to be extremely useful, especially with METAPOST.}}} @ARTICLE{26-15, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{111-119}}, title = {{MetaType1: a METAPOST-based engine for generating Type 1 fonts}}, keywords = {{outline fonts,scalable fonts,parameterized fonts,Type 1 fonts,METAFONT,METAPOST}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{225}}, author = {{Bogus{\l}aw Jackowski, Janusz M. Nowacki, Piotr Strzelczyk}}, names = {{Bogus{\l}aw Jackowski, Janusz M. Nowacki, Piotr Strzelczyk}}, abstract = {{A package for preparing parameterized outline fonts in PostScript Type 1 format is described. The package makes use of METAPOST, awk, and T1utils, therefore is supposed to be easily portable to various computer platforms. Its beta version along with a sample font (Knuth's logo font) is available from: ftp://bop.eps.gda.pl/pub/metatype1}}} @ARTICLE{26-16, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{120-129}}, title = {{Natural {\TeX} Notation in Mathematics}}, keywords = {{natural mathematical notation}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{164}}, author = {{Michal Marvan}}, names = {{Michal Marvan}}, abstract = {{In this paper we introduce Nath, a {\LaTeX} 2.09/2e style implementing a natural {\TeX} notation for mathematics.}}} @ARTICLE{26-17, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{130-140}}, title = {{{\TeX} in teaching}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{148}}, author = {{Michael Moortgat, Richard Moot, Dick Oehrle}}, names = {{Michael Moortgat, Richard Moot, Dick Oehrle}}, abstract = {{A well-known slogan in language technology is `parsing-as-deduction': syntax and meaning analysis of a text takes the form of a mathematical proof. Developers of language technology (and students of computational linguistics) want to visualize these mathematical objects in a variety of formats. We discuss a language engineering environment for computational grammars. The kernel is a theorem prover, implemented in the logic-programming language Prolog. The kernel produces {\LaTeX} source code for its internal computations. The front-end displays these in a number of user-defined typeset formats. Local interaction with the kernel is via a tcl/tk GUI. Alternatively, one can call the kernel remotely from dynamic PDF documents, using the form features of Sebastian Rahtz' hyperref package.}}} @ARTICLE{26-18, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{141-145}}, title = {{Poligraf: from {\TeX} to printing house}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{77}}, author = {{Janusz Marian Nowacki}}, names = {{Janusz Marian Nowacki}}, abstract = {{The macro package Poligraf was for the first time presented at the Polish {\TeX} Users' Group meeting `Bacho{\TeX}'96'. Users' suggestions and remarks have been taken into account leading to this new, completely re-worked version.}}} @ARTICLE{26-19, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{146-150}}, title = {{Extending Ex{\TeX}}}, keywords = {{ex{\TeX},DSSSL,file location,extension of ex{\TeX},primitives in ex{\TeX}}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{77}}, author = {{Simon Pepping}}, names = {{Simon Pepping}}, abstract = {{What can be done after the completion of Ex{\TeX}? I describe a dream, some results, and some further ideas.}}} @ARTICLE{26-20, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{151-161}}, title = {{Directions for the {\TeX}Live system}}, keywords = {{{\TeX}Live,web2c}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{159}}, author = {{Fabrice Popineau}}, names = {{Fabrice Popineau}}, abstract = {{This paper is about the current status of the {\TeX}Live software. The first part of the paper will address the structured description of its content and how the Windows 1 setup program can use it. The past experiments with the Windows installer have revealed that the problem was harder than expected. The new {\TeX}Live 6 description files will allow a more effective way to use the setup program. Some further enhancements are even scheduled. The second part of the paper will address a set of possible extensions to the Web2C/Kpathsea pair (read it as a call for code contributions!). Some aspects of its use were not foreseen when it was devised and it may be time for an enhancement.}}} @ARTICLE{26-21, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{162-172}}, title = {{DCpic, Commutative Diagrams in a (La){\TeX} Document}}, keywords = {{Communicative diagrams,{\LaTeX},{\TeX},pic{\TeX}}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{147}}, author = {{Pedro Quaresma}}, names = {{Pedro Quaresma}}, abstract = {{DCpic is a package of {\TeX} macros for graphing Commutative Diagrams in a (La){\TeX} or {Con\TeX t} document. Its distinguishing features are: the use of PIC{\TeX} a powerful graphical engine, and a simple specification syntax. A commutative diagram is described in terms of its objects and its arrows. The objects are textual elements and the arrows can have various straight or curved forms. We describe the syntaxand semantics of the user's commands, and present many examples of their use.}}} @ARTICLE{26-22, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{173}}, title = {{Using pdf{\TeX} in a PDF-based imposition tool}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{25}}, author = {{Martin Schr\"oder}}, names = {{Martin Schr\"oder}}, abstract = {{pdf{\TeX} has been used successfully to build an industrial-strength PDF-based imposition tool. This paper/talk describes the pitfalls we encountered and the lessons learned.}}} @ARTICLE{26-23, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{174-186}}, title = {{ASCII-Cyrillic and its converter email-ru.tex}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{112}}, author = {{Laurent Siebenmann}}, names = {{Laurent Siebenmann}}, abstract = {{A new faithful ASCII representation for Russian called ASCII-Cyrillic is presented here, one which permits accurate typing and reading of Russian where no Russian keyboard or font is available -- as often occurs outside of Russia. ASCII-Cyrillic serves the Russian and Ukrainian languages in parallel. This article initially discusses Russian; but, further along, come the modifications needed to adapt to the Ukrainian alphabet.}}} @ARTICLE{26-24, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{187}}, title = {{A Tour around the NTS implementation}}, keywords = {{NTS,Java,extension}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{34}}, author = {{Karel Skoupy}}, names = {{Karel Skoupy}}, abstract = {{NTS is a modular object-oriented reimplementation of {\TeX} written in Java. This document is a summary of a presentation which shows the path along which the characters and constructions present in the input file pass through the machinery of the program and get typeset. Along the way the key classes and concepts of NTS are visited, the differences with original {\TeX} are explained and the good points where to dig into the system are proposed.}}} @ARTICLE{26-25, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{188-191}}, title = {{Visual {\TeX}: {\TeX}lite}}, keywords = {{visual,{\TeX}}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{54}}, author = {{Igor Strokov}}, names = {{Igor Strokov}}, abstract = {{A prototype of a visual {\TeX} is implemented by means of minor modifications of canonical {\TeX}. The changes include the ability to start compilation from an arbitrary page, fast paragraph reformatting, and retaining the origin of visual elements. The new features provide direct editing of the document preview and correct markup of the source text.}}} @ARTICLE{26-26, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{192-206}}, title = {{Conversion of {\TeX} fonts into Type 1 format}}, keywords = {{PDF,font conversion,Type 1 fonts,METAFONT,vector,outline,raster,bitmap,pdf{\TeX}}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{165}}, author = {{P\'eter Szab\'o}}, names = {{P\'eter Szab\'o}}, abstract = {{This paper analyses the problem of converting {\TeX} fonts to Type 1 fonts, describes {\TeX}trace, a new free conversion program, and compares it to other possible methods and existing utilities. {\TeX}trace works by rendering the font in high resolution and then tracing (vectorizing) it.}}} @ARTICLE{26-27, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{207-216}}, title = {{Math typesetting in {\TeX}: The good, the bad, the ugly}}, keywords = {{math typesetting,math fonts,symbol fonts,font metrics,font encodings}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{122}}, author = {{Ulrik Vieth}}, names = {{Ulrik Vieth}}, abstract = {{Taking the conference motto as a theme, this papers examines the good, the bad, and the ugly bits of {\TeX}'s math typesetting engine and the related topic of math fonts. Unlike previous discussions of math fonts, which have often focussed on glyph sets and font encodings, this paper concentrates on the technical requirements for math fonts, trying to clarify what makes implementing math fonts so difficult and what could or should be done about it.}}} @ARTICLE{26-28, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{217-218}}, title = {{Typography and production of manuscripts and incunabula}}, keywords = {{typography,manuscript,incunabulum}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{36}}, author = {{Paul Wackers}}, names = {{Paul Wackers}}, abstract = {{This paper describes how the modern type of books slowly came into existence during the middle ages. The first printers modeled their products on these handwritten books but needed -- in time -- some adjustments because of the differences in production between a manuscript and a printed book and because of the differences between producing for a patron or for an anonymous mass market.}}} @ARTICLE{26-29, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{219-243}}, title = {{Reintroducing type 3 fonts to the world of {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{516}}, author = {{W{\l}odek Bzyl}}, names = {{W{\l}odek Bzyl}}, abstract = {{Nowadays, a great number of documents are produced every day. Many authors would like their documents to stand out from the rest not only by content but also by typographic design. For this purpose one may use decorative letters, ornaments, dingbats and special fonts. If each document would have to look different from all the others a great many fonts and font deviations are needed. This could be achieved by combining the METAPOST language with the type 3 font format. This new font creation technology enables users endless single-use-only variations in weight and width, style and size, and in color. A new level of control over the embellishment level off onts in documents is thereby achieved.}}} @ARTICLE{26-30, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{244-245}}, title = {{Literate Programming, not just another pretty face}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2001}}, volume = {{26}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{64}}, author = {{Michael Guravage}}, names = {{Michael Guravage}}, abstract = {{The structure of a software program may be thought of as a `web' that is made of many interconnected pieces. To document such a program, we want to explain each individual part of the web and how it relates to its neighbors. D.E.K.}}} @BOOK{maps27, type = {{book}}, language = {{NL/EN}}, pages = {{1-119}}, title = {{MAPS 2002.1}}, keywords = {{NTG,MAPS}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, series = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{3635}}, editor = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, abstract = {{NTG's magazine}}} @ARTICLE{27-1, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{1}}, title = {{Redactioneel}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, publisher = {{NTG}}, size = {{45}}, editor = {{Johannes Braams}}, names = {{Johannes Braams}}, } @ARTICLE{27-2, type = {{message}}, language = {{EN/NL}}, pages = {{2-5}}, title = {{{\TeX} gebruikersgroepen}}, keywords = {{gebruikersgroepen,user groups}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{60}}, author = {{Erik Frambach}}, names = {{Erik Frambach}}, abstract = {{Een overzicht van alle ons bekende {\TeX} gebruikersgroepen met bijbehorende contactgegevens.}}} @ARTICLE{27-3, type = {{message}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{6}}, title = {{Agenda}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{43}}, author = {{Jules van Weerden}}, names = {{Jules van Weerden}}, } @ARTICLE{27-4, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{7-9}}, title = {{Een uittreksel uit de recente bijdragen in het CTAN archief}}, keywords = {{{\TeX},{\LaTeX},Packages,CTAN,Type 1 fonts,fonts,PDF,pstricks,PostScript}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{62}}, author = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, names = {{Piet van Oostrum}}, abstract = {{Dit artikel beschrijft een aantal recente bijdragen uit het CTAN archief. De selectie is gebaseerd op wat ik zelf interessant vind en wat ik denk dat voor veel anderen interessant is. Het is dus wel een persoonlijke keuze. Het heeft niet de bedoeling om een volledig overzicht te geven. De uitgebreidere bijdragen zijn ook geen handleidingen. Beschouw het maar als een soort menukaart die de bedoeling heeft om de lezer te laten watertanden.}}} @ARTICLE{27-5, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{10-12}}, title = {{Patenten, copyright en 'intellectual property'}}, keywords = {{Software patenten,WIPO,EPO,standaarden,Europa}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{93}}, author = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, names = {{Siep Kroonenberg}}, abstract = {{In dit stuk wordt aandacht gevraagd voor software patenten en andere aanslagen op onze elektronische vrijheid.}}} @ARTICLE{27-6, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{13}}, title = {{Letter from Knuth}}, keywords = {{Letter}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{601}}, author = {{Donald Knuth}}, names = {{Donald Knuth}}, abstract = {{A facsimile copy of a letter by Donald E. Knuth to Siep Kroonenberg about the Euro{\TeX}2002 proceedings. In the letter, dated 26 November 2001, Donald E. Knuth congratulates Siep Kroonenberg on the "most beautiful design and production of the Euro{\TeX}2001 proceedings." He further describes how both he and Mrs. Knuth love its look and feel. The letter is hand written with a pencil on the personal stationery (Donald E. Knuth, Professor Emeritus of The Art of Computer Programming) of the Stanford University in Stanford, California. Although the actual text of the letter is somewhat more concise than this abstract, it is a must-see for any {\TeX} user.}}} @ARTICLE{27-7, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{14-19}}, title = {{Meta-Euro}}, keywords = {{Euro symbol,MetaPost}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{68}}, author = {{Patrick Gundlach}}, names = {{Patrick Gundlach}}, abstract = {{How to create the Euro symbol in Metapost.}}} @ARTICLE{27-8, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{20-22}}, title = {{The euro symbol}}, keywords = {{Euro symbol,MetaPost}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{54}}, author = {{Hans Hagen}}, names = {{Hans Hagen}}, abstract = {{When Patrick Grundlach posted a nice MetaPost version of the euro symbol to the {Con\TeX t} discussion list, he added the comment "The official construction is ambigious: how thick are the horizontal bars? How much do they stick out to the left? Is this thing a circle or what? Are the angles on the left side of the bars the same as the one on the right side? ..." The alternative below is probably not as official as his, but permits a finetuning. You are warned: whatever you try, the euro is and will remain an ugly symbol.}}} @ARTICLE{27-9, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{23-28}}, title = {{Doing it my way: a lone {\TeX}er in the real world}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{135}}, author = {{Jean-Luc Doumont}}, names = {{Jean-Luc Doumont}}, abstract = {{While a world-renowned standard in many academic fields, Don Knuth's much acclaimed typesetting system is almost unknown in most parts of the real world, where many a document designer has achieved professional success without ever hearing (let alone pronouncing) the word `{\TeX}'. Outside academia, the lone {\TeX}er faces not only compatibility headaches, but also outright incomprehension from his customers, colleagues, or competitors: why would anyone want to use {\TeX} to produce memos, two-color newsletters, full-color brochures, overhead transparencies, and other items -- in short, anything but books that contain a lot of mathematics? As a consultant in professional communication, I have been using {\TeX} for all documents I have produced for my clients and for myself during the last ten years or so. Though it has turned out to be most successful, this approach is seen by most as a mere idiosyncrasy. And yet, the systematic use of my own {\TeX} and PostScript programming gives me three unequalled advantages over using off-the-shelf software: I travel light, I can go anywhere I please, and I guarantee I'll get there.}}} @ARTICLE{27-10, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{29-35}}, title = {{Drawing effective (and beautiful) graphs with {\TeX}}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{407}}, author = {{Jean-Luc Doumont}}, names = {{Jean-Luc Doumont}}, abstract = {{A standard approach to producing documents that include illustrations consists in typesetting text with specialized typesetting software (such as {\TeX}) and inserting illustrations created with different, equally specialized software. To better integrate the illustrations into the typeset page, it would be nice to be able to produce or modify them directly with the typesetting software. Drawing graphs with {\TeX}, for example, would allow one to set them \hsize wide and 0.75\hsize high, position labels exactly \baselineskip below the horizontal axis, and, especially, typeset all annotations with the same fonts, sizes, and mathematical beauty as the rest of the document. The hybrid {\TeX} and PostScript macros presented in this paper take advantage of {\TeX}'s power to graph and annotate data sets in a variety of ways in order to produce effective, beautiful, well-integrated graphs. They use {\TeX} to draw all horizontal and vertical lines (axes, tick marks, grid lines) and set all annotations, and PostScript to draw the data, as markers, lines, and areas. While fairly simple, they have been successfully harnessed to appear in a wide range of real-life applications, up to logarithmic graphs and (with some patience) complex multipanel displays. Of course, the macros are a tool for drawing final graphs rather than exploring or transforming data sets.}}} @ARTICLE{27-11, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{36-40}}, title = {{Figures}}, keywords = {{}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{477}}, author = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}}, names = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}}, abstract = {{Within the {\TeX} community there is a widely used database for bibliographic references, BIB-{\TeX}, but not for figures. To manage figures {Con\TeX t} now supports a figures database. The database is setup in XML and converted to an interactive PDF figure library featuring ordered displays and a search mechanism. From the library, figures can be included easily in {Con\TeX t} documents as long as both the PDF and the XML files remain present.}}} @ARTICLE{27-12, type = {{article}}, language = {{NL}}, pages = {{41-44}}, title = {{DTP'en met {\LaTeX}, gebruik en adviezen}}, keywords = {{{\LaTeX},4all{\TeX},PostScript}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{258}}, author = {{Ernst van der Storm}}, names = {{Ernst van der Storm}}, abstract = {{Verslag van het gebruik van {\LaTeX} voor DTP-doeleinden, met enkele eenvoudige macro's en het integreren van platjes: een beschrijving aan de hand van de praktijk.}}} @ARTICLE{27-13, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{45-50}}, title = {{From PC-Write to {Con\TeX t} easy speedy beauty}}, keywords = {{non-guru,4{\TeX},{Con\TeX t}}}, year = {{2002}}, volume = {{27}}, journal = {{MAPS}}, size = {{419}}, author = {{Karel Wesseling, Gertrude van der Sar, Jos Settels}}, names = {{Karel Wesseling, Gertrude van der Sar, Jos Settels}}, abstract = {{A tale of more than 10 years of joy and struggle with {\TeX} followed by a period of bliss, of easy to use tools, quickly obtained results and incredible possibilities from the coming of 4TeX and {Con\TeX t}, narrated by non-gurus.}}} @ARTICLE{27-14, type = {{article}}, language = {{EN}}, pages = {{51-55}}, title = {{A do-it-yourself thebibliography in {Con\TeX t}}}, keywords = {{non-guru,{\LaTeX},{Co